Home

Chevrolet 2007 Automobile User Manual

1. ceeeeeeeeeneeees 594 575 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 576 Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time
2. 353 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 4 353 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 0008 337 Radio with CD vasicccscateccsantiasesvensteeedanrieaes 294 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceceeeeeeeeees 348 Setting the Time 0 291 292 293 Theft Deterrent Feature ceeeeeeeee 350 Understanding Radio Reception 352 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 354 Audio System s Radio with CD and DVD ceeeeeee 305 Rear Side Window Antenna 006 354 Automatic Headlamp System ceeee 217 Automatic Transmission FIU Reactor creer separ ere nee te 466 Operation irinin ieee eaten 145 PUTO assieta u a 422 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch 218 620 Battery sisschvcsaaseveresiatuecnia laced anadegadtnsaicacraaicng 490 Electric Power Management 00 220 Run Down Protection ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 221 Before Leaving on a Long Trip nesses 396 Bench Seat Split 60 40 o e 20 Brake EMe IrgencleS aone a 363 PARIDO sie sFasetvngccantunevns ESA 156 Br KOS arr oc thoaieneetpantensctpateoecngiaeess 486 System Warning Light cceeeee 249 Braking serinin a agen 360 Braking in Emergencies sseeeeeeeeeeeees 363 Break In New Vehicle ccceceeeeeeeeeeees 139 Bucket Seats Rear ccccceceseesseeeeeeeeeeeaeees 26 Bulb Replacemen
3. cceecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 601 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 173 Operation Universal Home Remote System ccceecceeeeeeeeeees 178 182 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeeeees 204 Outlet Adjustment ccccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 238 628 Outlets Accessory POWGM cescscicee cccdsnese cca veezeccesenenes 225 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ecse 172 CONVEX MION sccscasiccvessiteccnsadivedtbarreuacantets 173 Curb View Assist Mirrors ecse 172 Heated Mirrors ccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 Manual Mirrors ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 Power Foldaway Mirrors ceseeeeeeeee 171 Power Mirrors ec cssseverdssreseddcarsiseerdsevanensiates 170 Trailer TOW Mirrors cccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 0 ccceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeees 476 Owner Checks and Services 00cc0eeeee 586 Owners Canadian ccccccccececaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 3 P Paint DAMAGE sasesana iiaia 560 Park AIG assino nononono 222 Park P Shifting INO sive anand 157 Shifting Out Of ccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 Parking ASSIST ranae a a 222 Braker arassa aa SaS 156 Over Things That Burn eessen 159 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 246 Passenger Sensing System eseeeeees 101 PASSING opeen N teed EEEE ANENE 369 PASS Key WIE o oiisisssssiisisisseisisinirisisnnnen 137 PA
4. After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely locked into the siderail Your vehicle has a Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL located above the rear glass If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit 191 Rear Storage Area Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver s side trim panel To open the utility compartment turn the knobs and swing the compartment door open The compartment door can be removed Rear Seat Armrest Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrest Pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders 192 Cargo Cover A CAUTION An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it in the proper storage location When you put it back always be sure that it is securely reattached If your vehicle has a cargo cover you can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle To use the cover do the following 1 Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets on the cargo area trim panels To return the cover to the retracted position do the following 1 Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover posts from the retaining sockets
5. 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle out of the retractor to set the lock the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 88 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 8 If the airbag is off the off indicator will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or START If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust
6. e Unusual wear Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar below the driver s door lock post striker This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the spare tire For additional information regarding the spare tire see Spare Tire on page 552 515 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pres
7. e Wiper Blades Are they in good shape e Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean e Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure e Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your vehicle s mirrors and instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exer
8. Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Third Row Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat the seatback s can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled or removed from the vehicle Folding the Seatback s To fold the seatback do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Remove all items on the seat cushion Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety
9. N Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 485 Engine Oil If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message in the Driver Information Center DIC comes on check the engine oil level right away For more information see CHECK OIL LEVEL under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 You should check the engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground 459 The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick you need to add at least one quart liter of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 572 460 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that
10. e A switch in the down position may be labeled as Down or Off e A switch in the middle position may be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral 2 Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows e When a switch is in the up position write Left e When a switch is in the down position write Right e If a switch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 will now become the button strokes you enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 in order from left to right into the Universal Home Remote when completing Step 4 3 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode 187 5 After entering all of the switch positions again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to Left Middle Right 55 seconds o 7 Immediately release the button when the On Neutral Off garage door moves The i
11. 2 Let the cover move forward to the full retracted position To remove the cover from a regular wheelbase model do the following 1 Let the cover go all the way into the holder 2 Then grasping the driver s side cover end cap push the cover end cap toward the passenger s side of the vehicle 3 Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle To put the cover in the vehicle do the following 1 2 Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down Then hold the cover at an angle and place the cover end cap into the slot in the passenger s side trim panel Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it next to the driver s side trim panel slot Press the end caps in this will allow the cover to fit into the trim slot Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure it is secure On the extended wheelbase models there are two cover positions The slots furthest forward allow the cover to be used if the third seat is removed or folded down The cover can be installed and removed from either side 193 Cargo Tie Downs Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle Cargo Management System Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management system It can be used for storing and separating cargo and as a table The maximum load is 200 lbs 91 k
12. A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 7 Make sure the safety belts are returned to the original position over the seatbacks 37 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too 38 A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly
13. Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if your vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if your vehicle has this feature The DVD player may be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 348 for more information 341 When a device is connected to the A V jacks or the radio s auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen The video screen is located in the RSE overhead console To use the video screen do the following 1 Push the release button located on the RSE overhead console 2 Turn the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position 342 If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the s
14. Driver s Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Instrument Panel Back Lighting Passenger s Side Turn Signal RT STOP TRN Stoplamp Body Control Module UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 Unlock Feature Sends Gecmres cals Com Cers UT Stop TAN Com Risto Tan Cecon Com Gmc Coeg pee LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 Lock Feature e rom Exe es Stoplamps Center High Mounted Ene Eso poo STOP LAMPS S oe ari i 9 Cee REAR WER REAR HVAC Rear Climate Controls PDM Passenger Door Module Universal Home Remote System AUX PWR Accessory Power Outlets BODY cdo en stars Dsm Driver s Side Power Window Circuit REAR SEAT 565 Fuses Us Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel to the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist j lumn OBS DET Power Liftgate left of the steering column LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature Top View REAR WPR Cor Not Used HEADLINER DSM Driver Seat Module Remote 3 Keyless Entry System mo 2 Harness HEADLINER Connector 1 LT DR Driver s Door Harness Connection Ed BODY ali BODY Harness Connector BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 566 Harness Connector HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 Pica Brake Clutch Harness Connector Special Equipm
15. Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your passengers to buckle your safety belts See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 244 and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 245 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 39 Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop 40 The person keeps going until stopped by or the instrument panel something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield 41 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense 42 Questions and Answe
16. container only See Recommended Fluids few drops of mineral based oil such and Lubricants on page 590 as engine oil in the brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the they will have to be replaced Do not area around the cap before removing it This let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can Z CAUTION be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake on page 557 system the brakes may not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 488 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or
17. is about to stall and cannot make it up the hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here is what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you will need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It is best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover 381 Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill e Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you
18. you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays along with a continuous chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level 279 TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 485 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers 280 All of the customization options may no
19. 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the tune knob to display the category you want removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories 310 Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 335 later in this section for further detail P
20. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload 207 The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the band with the wiper symbol Mist Turn the band to mist for a single wiping cycle Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe Hold the band on mist longer for more wipe cycles Off To stop the wipers move the band to off i Delay The wiper speed can be set for a long or short delay between wiping cycles This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay GB Low Speed Turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings for steady wiping at low speed High Speed Turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings for high speed wiping 208 Rainsense Il Wipers If your vehicle has Rainsense I windshield wipers the moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield When active these sensors are able to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers To turn on the Rainsense feature the wipers must be set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction lever Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rainsensor Since different drivers have different se
21. Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not Known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that
22. IGNITION POSINONS siariorsianiierrnsitanna tass 140 Retained Accessory Power RAP 141 Starting the Engine rnesa 141 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 143 Engine Coolant Heater eeren 143 Active Fuel Management ccecce 145 Automatic Transmission Operation 145 Tow Haul Mode esisiini 149 Four Wheel Drive sssssreescsrrrenrrreensns 150 Parking Brake srccsorinorarianawiacero 156 Shifting Into Park P eeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeees 157 Shifting Out of Park P eseese 159 Parking Over Things That Burn 0 159 Engine Exhaust sccescsiscesssicheseestecetseesinnveesd 160 Running the Engine While Parked 161 111 Section 2 Features and Controls MIO Seesen n A 162 Universal Home Remote System 177 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror System Identification cceeeeeeeeeeees 177 with OnStar Compass and Universal Home Remote System 178 Temperature Display c s 162 Universal Home Remote System Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Operation With One Triangular LED 178 Compass and Temperature Display 166 Universal Home Remote System Outside Manual Mirrors a c 168 Operation With Three Round LED 182 Outside Trailer Tow Mirrors 169 Storage Areas i i 190 Outside Power Mirrors s s s 170 GIOVE BOX eccvsccisveeesstetereeeviabsigeenavteetdaasctees 190 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 171 Cuphold
23. NEUTRAL N Shift the vehicle s transfer case to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 418 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 417 for more information If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service See SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive High or AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive Turn the knob to the Four Wheel High or AUTO position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low The indicator light will flash while shifting It will remain on when the shift is completed Shifting Into Two Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two Wheel High position This can be done at any speed except when shifting from Four Wheel Drive Low See shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low later in this section for more information Shifting Into Four Wheel Drive Low When Four Wheel Low is engaged vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph Extended high speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain To shift to the Four Wheel Drive Low position the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N The preferred method for shifting into Four Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the knob to the
24. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 556 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or col
25. Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading 496 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface e For 4 8L and 5 3L engines the proper level is from 0 04 inch to 0 75 inch 1 0 mm to 19 0 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level e For 6 0L engines the proper level is from 0 6 inch to 1 6 inches 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level e The proper fill level for the 2500 Series is from 0 to 1 2 inch 0 to 13 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located at the front of the axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level Four Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles There are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant Automatic Transfer Case To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you will need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level
26. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp 501 Bulb Replacement Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps A Taillamp Stoplamp B Back up Lamp C Turn Signal Lamp Taillamp For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 504 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 502 To replace one of these bulbs do the following 1 Open the liftgate See Power Liftgate on page 127 for more information 2 Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly IIG M 3 Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle Press the release tab if bulb socket has one and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it into the taillamp assembly Turn the bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks Reinstall the taillamp assembly When reinstalling make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp assembly with the vehicle If you do not do this you will not be able corre
27. Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts 578 If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 616 Owner Checks and Services on page 586 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 592 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine GM parts Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a y
28. and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Safety Chains You should always attach safety chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Attach the safety chains to the attaching point on the hitch platform If you are towing with an aftermarket hitch following the trailer or hitch manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground 432 Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak your trailer cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if e The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure e The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inches 0 3 cc of fluid fr
29. if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps 389 Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it 390 7 in Rain and on Wet Roads LM MN I Ne Hay ee Mi i 4 Wy Rai
30. l Seek When listening to FM AM or XM if equipped press the seek up or the seek down arrow to go to the next or the previous station or channels and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display will stop flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio 349 While listening to a disc press the seek up arrow to goto the next track or chapter on the disc Press the seek down arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than ten seconds have played This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor right or left on the menu PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is in
31. or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off 233 Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed A V Fan The buttons with the fan symbols allow you to manually adjust the fan speed Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off will turn the system on Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control will place the fan under manual control The fan setting will remain displayed and the AUTO light will turn off The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control 74 V Mode Press the mode up and down buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off will change air delivery mode without turning the system on Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control will place the mode under manual control 234 The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and the AUTO light will turn off The fan will remain under automatic control 74 Vent This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets 74 Bi Level This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and half to the floor outlets The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob i
32. the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping gasoline Do not use a cellular phone while pumping gasoline others e Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground CAUTION Continued 455 Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 456 A CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release near the center of the grille Push the secondary hood release to the right Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the fill
33. treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 WMA files a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R or CD RW contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not display on a CD R or CD RW that was recorded without folders or playlists When the CD R or CD RW contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in eac
34. Air Cleaner Filter If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator it lets you know when the engine air cleaner filter needs to be replaced On vehicles with a restriction indicator you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner filter when the indicator tells you to On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 83 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction Indicator Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air cleaner filter cover When the indicator turns black or is in the red orange change zone replace the filter and reset the indicator See the steps following to replace the engine air cleaner filter and to reset the air filter restriction indicator Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction Indicator To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engine air cleaner filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6 When you have the engine air cleaner filter removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new
35. And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to 158 If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you move the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park P on page 157 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of Park P Your
36. Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds 617 42 NOTES 618 A Accessories and Modifications 0 444 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar EQUIPIMOEMIN A E cuceastceseeedhteseee taney 412 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle iiaae 107 Additives Fuel svssiicisavsebedasavendisasvaierdaaveveress s 448 Add On Electrical Equipment 008 563 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 143 Air Cleaner Filter Engine ccccceeeeees 464 Air Conditioning ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 227 231 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator 008 246 Readiness Light 2c svesuenteexncsasevueecsasenmeret s 245 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM iraani iaaa 609 Airbag System 0 ccc eecceceeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeees 90 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates sicions 99 When Should an Airbag Inflate 96 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeees 93 Airbag Systems Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle e 107 How Does an A
37. ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 473 for more information This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 473 for further information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on p
38. Four Wheel Drive Low position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your transmission in gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL while the engine is running If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive Low position when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to Four Wheel Drive High mode 153 Shifting Out of Four Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four Wheel Drive Low to Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph 5 km h with the transmission in NEUTRAL N and the ignition in RUN The preferred method for shifting out of Four Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph 1 6 to 3 2 km h Turn the knob to the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two
39. INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds 407 The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 507 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 408 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will b
40. Install the two outboard bolts 373 Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached Be sure you read all the information about your four wheel drive or all wheel drive vehicle in this manual Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving If you do not know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission 374 Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving A CAUTION Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly CAUTION Continued Environmental Concerns CAUTION Continued Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these more likely to roll over You can
41. Mirror If your vehicle is equipped with this feature the drivers outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you This feature is controlled by the on and off settings found on the electrochromic inside mirror See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display on page 162 or Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display on page 166 for more information 172 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors If your vehicle has the memory package the outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror function This feature may be useful in in allowing the driver to view the curb when parallel parking This feature will cause the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R The passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and either a thirty second delay has occurred the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 12 km h or the ignition is turned to off This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 260 for more information Outside Convex Mirror Your passenger s side mirror may have convex glass A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like othe
42. Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors recommends against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your dealer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 562 If your vehicle has the 5 3L V8 engine Code 0 or the 5 3L V8 engine Code 3 you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 also see Fuel on page 446 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 447 Only vehicles that have the 5 3L V8 engine Code 0 or the 5 3L V8 engine Code 3 can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 We encourage the
43. O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 602 www Chevrolet com 1 800 222 1020 1 800 833 2438 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 243 8872 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program EIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date
44. Oil Life System eee 462 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 464 Automatic Transmission Fluid 0 466 Engine Coolant ianiai 470 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 473 Engine Overheating ceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 473 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeea sees 476 Cooling System cccceeeeeeeeenetteteeeeeeees 477 Engine Fan Noise scese 483 Power Steering Fluid 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 484 Windshield Washer Fluid 0 0068 485 Brakes 2 iccaistessanvaesuns abuts siabacderteuendhebanievads 486 Battery sveiincindi nie anneeteige 490 JUMP Staing serieei ienee eE 491 Rear Al oaccnccccenrwsncenoreni a 496 Four Wheel Drive 0 a 497 FONC AXIE serenti aA sed 498 Headlamp Aiming eceeeeeeeeeees 499 Bulb Replacement 00nn 502 Halogen BUDS vicicssacecsnedsaveneeeieevetnedeedineyess 502 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up LAMPS ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeees 502 License Plate Lamp aneneen 504 Replacement Bulbs ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 504 441 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 505 Appearance Care cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 553 TS EE E nates 507 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 553 Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 c cccccccceeeee 508 Fabric Catpet arrneo a 554 Tire Terminology and Definitions 512 Le
45. P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow With four wheel drive if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 422 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake Move the shift lever into the PARK P position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N Turn the ignition key to LOCK Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P 157 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set If you have four wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL
46. Panel Fuse Block 565 Power Windows and Other Power ODUONS siasio nanna R 564 Underhood Fuse Block cceceeeeeeees 567 Windshield Wiper Fuses scce 564 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 464 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 253 Golan Ree eer ee en a 470 Coolant Heater 0 00 0 eec ee se eee eee eee 143 Coolant Temperature Gage 0 252 Drive Belt Routing ceann 593 Engine Compartment Overview 458 Exhaust nenun nanea E 160 Fan NOMS Cece wtecstcs AS ence te date een aei 483 OIL eb eteae been ees occa teat ak ais 459 Engine cont Oil Life System 0 eceeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeetees 462 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 476 Overheating ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 473 Staring aaie EAE 141 Entry Lighting ecciesie 220 Event Data Recorders EDR 0 609 Exit LIONN sessicteitoccdceasineccattieed ecamnieevadiniee es 220 Extender Safety Belt ccccececeeceeeeeeeee ees 60 Exterior Lamps sise srra 215 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 464 Finish Damage c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 560 Flashers Hazard Warning eeeeeeeees 204 FlaSN2tO PASS ceco steeds dendesscenumevaeies 207 Flat TRG sonetai aai eE AAA 531 Flat Tire Changing sssri ieriniieiiroianos 532 Flat Tire Storing eresas 547 Fluid Automatic Transmission seee 466 Power Steering si chccece caste beee
47. SEO B1 Upfitter Usage Battery 53 Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet 54 Automatic Level Control Compressor Relay SEO Upfitter Usage 55 Climate Controls Ignition 56 Engine Control Module Secondary Fuel Pump Ignition Audio System Four Wheel Drive 43 Miscellaneous Ignition Rear Vision Camera Cruise Control Airbag System Ignition 570 sage o foomo O er Automatic Level Control Compressor e2 Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System _ 63 CooingFan2 O ea Anttock Brake System e fee ee Stud 2 rater Brakes 67 Lef Bussed Electrical Genter p68 Electric Running Boards eo Heated Windshield Washer System_ 70 FourWheel Drive System D Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery Power Mid Bussed Electrical Center 1 Climate Control Blower 74 Power Liftgate Module 75 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 61 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 Reas Uses 571 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 for more information Application For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer for more information 691 73L 69L 1651 57 Lt 9841 19 21 147 6 4L70 E Super Duty Transmission and 4L60 E Electronic 4L80 E Transmission 7 7 qt 572 Air Conditioning Re
48. Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you will notify General Motors Please call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 222 1020 or write Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 615 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Transmi
49. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL N See Four Wheel Drive on page 150 for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL N position for your vehicle 6 Release the parking brake only after the Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Shift the transmission to PARK P 2 Turn the engine off but leave the ignition on vehicle being towed is firmly attached to 3 Firmly set the parking brake the towing vehicle 4 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the 7 Turn the ignition off tow vehicle 419 Dolly Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice lf you tow a two wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed Two wheel drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly with the front wheels on the ground provided that the wheels are straight Four Wheel Drive Vehicles If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak it is not designed to be dolly towed If you need to tow your vehicle see Dinghy Towing earlier in this section 420 If your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak use the following procedure to tow your vehicle 1 Drive the vehicle up
50. The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a Satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada XM offers a large variety of coast to coast channels including music news sports talk traffic weather U S subscribers and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM In the U S at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 or in Canada at www xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 438 9677 Playing the Radio cb Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV The radio has Speed Compensated Volume SCV While SCV is on the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and
51. To change the current mode select one of the following 74 Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets 74 Bi Level This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets i Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system will automatically select outside air Recirculation cannot be selected when in Floor Mode 228 The right knob can also be used to select defog or defrost mode For more information see Defogging and Defrosting later in this section By positioning the right knob between two modes a combination of those two modes is selected The air conditioning compressor will be on unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Fan Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off lt gt Recirculation Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on When the button is pressed an indicator light will come on This m
52. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for 10 seconds Then slowly release the dial to the four low position The NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete 7 Ifthe engine is running verify that the transmission is in NEUTRAL N by shifting the transmission to REVERSE R for one second then shift the transmission to DRIVE D for one second 8 Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY which will turn the engine off 9 Place the transmission shift lever in PARK P 10 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle 11 Turn the ignition to LOCK Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following 1 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal 2 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off 3 Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer case shift position Two Wheel Drive High Four Wheel Drive High AUTO After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out 4 Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear 5 Start the engine and
53. a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program 599 STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2 General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your c
54. a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle you should see your dealer for service Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See StabiliTrak System on page 363 What should you do if this e
55. a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly A CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger s airbag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can that rear facing child restraints be move around in a collision or sudden stop and secured in the rear seat even if the injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child rest
56. access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than e with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee e in response to an official request of police or similar government office e as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or e as required by law In addition once GM collects or receives data GM may e use the data for GM research needs e make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non GM organizations for research purposes 610 Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data If your vehicle has OnStar please check the OnStar subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts
57. and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing e What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow 418 e Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e Is your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 396 Dinghy Towing Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice If you tow a two wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not tow a two wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL 5
58. and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If you turn off traction control only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activate constantly 366 Notice If you allow the wheel s of one axle to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message are displayed you could damage the transfer case The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and this message are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration or may hear a noise or vibration This is normal If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to use cruise again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 211 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that
59. are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call 911 for help Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the accident Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the accident This will help guard against post accident legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 604 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other ve
60. are located on left side of the steering wheel 212 X On Off This button can both activate and turn off the system The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Accelerate Press this button to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed SET Set Coast Press this button to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate Cancel Press this button to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Press the cruise control On Off button 2 Get up to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This shuts off the cruise control But you do not need to reset it Once yo
61. brakes off and on If you select SECOND 2 and the Tow Haul has not been selected the transmission will drive in SECOND 2 gear You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces If you select SECOND 2 and the Tow Haul has also been selected the transmission operation will be limited to FIRST 1 and SECOND 2 gears You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces FIRST 1 This position reduces vehicle speed even more than SECOND 2 without using your brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough 148 Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by your warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place When temperatures are very cold the Hydra Matic Automatic Transmission s gear shifting may be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is no
62. can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job Ina crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 17 Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the B head restraint press the OO release button A located on the top of the seatback while you push the head restraint down ae The front seats may have head restraints that also tilt forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint grasp the top of the restraint while pressing the button B located on the inboard side of the head restraint and move it forward or rearward until the desired locking position is reached Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The second row seats may
63. cannot be raised if the seat is seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted move forward in a sudden stop or crash 3 Make sure the safety belt in the center That could cause injury to the person seating position is not caught between the two sitting there Always push and pull on the seats and is not twisted seatback to be sure it is locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 22 Folding and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Lift the lever s located on the bottom rear of the second row seat s on the inboard side to release the seatback The seatback will fold forw
64. climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear 489 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacemen
65. come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As the details show on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your vehicle s warning lights and gages They can be a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with warning lights and gages See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information Instrument Panel Cluster United States version shown Canada similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically 243 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
66. comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 246 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator S Lhe A mL a United States Canada When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate A CAUTION If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger s seat it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger s frontal airbag A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airba
67. control e What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel e Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and they will not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times A CAUTION Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious accident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 383 Q Are there some things should not do Q Am likely to stall when going downhill n Ha a A A Itis much more likely to happen going A Yes These are important because if you uphill But if it happens going downhill here is ignore them you could lose control and what to do have a serious accident 1 Stop your vehicle by applying the regular e When driving downhill avoid turns that take brakes Apply the parking brake you across the incline of the hill A hill that 2 Shift to PARK P and while still braking is not too steep to drive down may be restart the engine too steep to drive across You could roll over if you do not drive straig
68. cool dry place Remote Control Buttons cb Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off y Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on 343 Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function could vary for each disc Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the up down left and right arrow buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A W lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu L Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or Zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active 344 E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this
69. could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children CAUTION Continued Driver s Side shown 133 The driver s door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 141 Press the switch to lower the window Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window Express Down Windows The driver and front passenger windows have an express down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch Press down fully on the window switch then release to activate the express down mode The express down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front edge of the switch 134 Window Lockout fa Window Lockout The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver s door armrest This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating except from the driver s position Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the
70. could go out of control Instead apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down 382 A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission You or someone else could be injured If you are going to leave your vehicle set the parking brake and shift the transmission to PARK P But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL e Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it is steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you cannot make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill Q Suppose after stalling try to back down the hill and decide just cannot do it What should do Set the parking brake put your transmission in PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle Leave it in some gear A Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you will want to consider a number of things e How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle
71. dealer Under certain circumstances a delay in updating the temperature is normal Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on automatically each time the ignition is started To operate the automatic dimming mirror do the following 1 Make sure the green indicator light located to the left of the on off button is lit If it is not press and hold the on off button for approximately six seconds until the green light comes on indicating that the mirror is in automatic dimming mode 2 Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by pressing and holding the on off button for approximately six seconds until the green indicator light turns off 163 Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e After approximately five seconds the display does not show a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item e The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push the on off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h
72. depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 527 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not ov
73. device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions CAUTION Continued 530 CAUTION Continued To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires Notice If your vehicle has P265 70R17 size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use chains that are the proper size for your vehicle s tires Install them on the rear tires only Do not use chains on the front tires Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle lf a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that sid
74. doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 470 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed 585 k Inspect system Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed I f you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change m Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 586 At Each Fuel Fill It is
75. figure about 150 lbs 68 kg for each seat The total cargo load must not be more than your vehicle s CWR Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached so that you won t go over the GVWR or GAWR If you are using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place You ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 422 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Servite ea ai aniei ea NEE 444 Accessories and Modifications 0 444 California Proposition 65 Warning 445 Doing Your Own Service Work 445 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle 0 0 cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 446 a E a exteee aaeetend ized eentons 446 Gasoline Octane ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 447 Gasoline Specifications ccceeeeeeeeee ee 447 California Fuel 0cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 447 AdAS arsena EA 448 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol sacarina 449 Fuels in Foreign Countries ceee 450 Filling the Tank w2csieccresvwodsesvaridsven sates 451 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 455 Checking Things Under the Hood 456 Hood Release ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeees 457 Engine Compartment Overview 458 Engine OW sinian eii 459 Engine
76. filter is required Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 2 Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover 465 A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off 3 Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible Automatic Transmission Fluid 4 Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealin i surfaces Ske housing s When to Check and Change Automatic 5 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Transmission Fluid 6 Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws A good time to check your automatic transmission 7 Reset the air filter restriction indicator if TEI Ne ie when the engmeail changed the vehicle has one by pressing the top button Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in on the indicator Additional Required Services on page 582 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 466 How to Check Automati
77. folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode was chosen as the default display The new track name displays 329 File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files 330 Playing an MP3 WMaA In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a softkey menu appears and allows navigation of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through available folders a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey o
78. frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles with roof mounted rollover airbags What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After a frontal airbag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof mounted rollover airbags may still be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest Some components of the airbag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s airbag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag and the area along the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows for vehicles with roof mounted side impact airbags may be hot for a short time The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags 99 Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
79. gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition Low Fuel Warning Light This light under the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine 260 This light and a chime will come on when the fuel tank is low on fuel There will also be a FUEL LEVEL LOW message on the Driver Information Center see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information When you add fuel this light and message should go off If it does not have your vehicle serviced Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off If your vehicle has DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Button
80. go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about two minutes then will turn off to save the battery power Your vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system 135 The theft deterrent system will not activate if you lock the doors with a key the manual door lock or the power door lock switch It activates only if you use the RKE transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you do not want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed If you set off the alarm by accident turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START 136 Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the RKE transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the al
81. ground wire For further information on roof mount emergency lamp installation please visit the GM Upfitter website at www gmupfitters com or contact your dealer If your vehicle has this button your vehicle may have the snow plow prep package For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 412 Instrument Panel Brightness 6 Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights The knob for this feature is located next to the headlamp control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrument panel cluster or radio display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking lamps are on To turn on the dome lamps turn the knob to the farthest clockwise position Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when a door is opened The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the knob located next to the exterior lamps control clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override 7 Dome Lamp Override Press the dome override button located next to the exterior lamps control to keep the dome lamps off when a door is open To set the lamps to the automatic operation press the button again so that it is extended With the button in this position the dome lamp
82. have head rests that can be adjusted up and down but they do not tilt Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down For information on safety belts for this position see Center Front Passenger Position on page 53 Rear Seats Heated Seats If the rear seats have the heated seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the Rear Seat Audio RSA panel Driver s Side RSA Heated Seat Button Only shown Heated Seat To heat the seat cushion press the button with the heated seat symbol A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn it off 19 Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off If the vehicle is restarted the heated seat button will need to be pressed again to restart the feature 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row If your vehicle has a 60 40 split bench the seat s can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seat
83. heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system The indicator light will flash This activation will initiate four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed This is a normal condition 210 Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever To turn the rear wiper on slide the lever to a wiper position Off To turn the wiper off slide the lever to this setting Rear Wiper Delay To turn on the rear wiper delay slide the lever to this setting Rear Wiper To turn on the rear wiper slide the lever to this setting i J Rear Wiper Wash To turn on the rear wiper wash push the button on the end
84. hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service 176 Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times OnStar service that involves location information about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available in that place as well Your vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service to you at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of your vehicle in an accident hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility You may need to increase the volume of your radio to hear the OnStar advisor If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red this means that your system is not functioning properly and should be checked by your dealer retailer If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired You can always press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System System Identification Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote System If there are three round LED indicator lights ab
85. important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 459 for further details Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by your warranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COO coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 470 for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you
86. inside use the power door locks or manual door locks To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks push down or pull up on the manual lock knob 122 Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the armrest on the front doors A Unlock Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to unlock the doors Lock Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock the doors Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the remote keyless entry RKE transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center DIC See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for more information on DIC programming 123 Rear Door Security Locks Yo
87. is locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 29 Folding and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 30 2 Lift the lever located on the bottom rear of the second row seat on the inboard side to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward 3 Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward Automatic Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in PARK P for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one sitting in
88. it is locked Tumbling the Third Row Seat The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo space 5 Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor 34 6 Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place 7 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it Z CAUTION is locked Put the seat in this position only when necessary If the seatback is not locked it could for additional cargo space move forward in a sudden stop or crash Returning the Third Row Seat from a That could cause injury to the person Por sitting there Always push and pull on the Tumbled Position seatback to be sure it is locked To return the seat to the normal seating position do the following 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for is locked the seat i 2 Make sure there is nothing that could become Removing the Third Row Seat trapped under the seat To remove the seat do the following 3 Release the seat from the tumbled position by 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for lifting the lever located next to the carrying the seat handle at the bottom rear of the seat 2 Fold the seatback forward using the 4 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor instructions listed under Folding the The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is Seatbacks previously The seat cannot be not latched to the floor removed unless the seatback is folded 5 Pull up on the seatback
89. it has been replaced To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 537 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the wheel Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible 547 Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the H Spare Tire Flat J Hoist End of spare tire carrier Refer to the following graphics Tire Valve Stem Extension Tool and instructions to help you Pointed Down K Spare Tire Lock Hoist Shaft Access Hole 1 Put the tire H on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear A Hoist Assembly D Jack Handle B Hoist Shaft Extensions C Hoist Shaft E Wheel Wrench Access F Hoist Cable Cover Hole G Tire Retainer 548 Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 4 I
90. jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place so that the secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable A CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare 546 13 14 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack with the other hand Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the hoist end of the extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire the rest of the way 15 Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 16 Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until
91. keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system 138 To program the new additional key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the RUN position within five seconds of removing the original key 5 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are driving and the security light comes on and stays on you may be able to restart your engine Your PASS Key IIl system however may not be working properly and must be serviced by your dealer If you lose or damage your PASS Key IIl key see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km e Do not drive at any one constant spe
92. lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are 395 Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it 396 Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside
93. later in this section e Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions See Tow Haul Mode later in this section Three important considerations have to do with weight e The weight of the trailer e The weight of the trailer tongue e The weight on your vehicle s tires 423 Tow Haul Mode Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load The purpose of the Tow Haul mode is to e Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load e Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a ee ee heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded e Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Press this button at the end of the shift lever to e Increase the charging system v
94. level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform e Ifthe vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e Ifthe vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Frontal airbags driver and right front passenger are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the fore and aft position of the driver s seat Seat position sensors provide information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle may or may not have roof mounted rollover airbags and a rollover sensor See Airbag System on page 90 These rollover capable airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes during a rollover or in a severe
95. may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253 If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty 447 Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to your fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels 448
96. meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment 611 Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs 612 If an Accident Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident Try to relax and then check to make sure you
97. minutes after the ignition key has been turned off You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a weight distributing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch 421 Autoride If equipped the Autoride feature will provide a superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride Autoride also interacts with the tow haul switch that when engaged will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 259 for more information 422 Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 139 for more information A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull
98. music navigator screen Now the aloum name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album 333 To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays 334 If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks u
99. of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 603 Roadside Assistance Program In the U S call 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 243 8872 In Canada call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance program Who is Covered Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle operator regardless of ownership In Canada a person driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for coverage The following services are provided in the U S during the Bumper to Bumper warranty period and in Canada during the Base Warranty coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty up to a maximum coverage of 100 604 Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station approximately 5 in Canada Service to provide diesel may be restricted For safety reasons propane and other alternative fuels will not be provided through this service Lock out Service To ensure security the driver must present personal identification befor
100. on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 363 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time 360 Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy accelerati
101. or XM if equipped The display shows the selection J Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations K SEEK Press the left or right SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band i Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category could appear Continue pressing the information button to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label is displayed When information is not available No Info displays Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to your favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them See Defensive Driving on page 356 FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pus
102. outside mirrors and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal To save your positions in memory do the following 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar both outside mirrors and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position See Outside Power Mirrors on page 170 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 143 for more information Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall their positions Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedals will have the ability to save and recall their positions 2 Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard indicating that the position has been stored A second seating mirror and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in PARK P Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat outside mirrors and adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the position previously stored You will hear a single beep If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on automatic seat adjustable mirror and adjustable pedal movements will occur See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for more information 13 To stop recall movement of
103. page 444 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may
104. passenger s safety belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 109 42 NOTES 110 Section 2 Features and Controls IOVS pais sores ete tes te dees cance teens 113 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 114 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System OPEAUOM a tesdieeaderascesaaedsevessdecctyteanccsaante 115 Doors and LOCKS ccccccee seca eeeeeees 122 DOOr LOCKS wicicsccdici teas E T E 122 Power Door LOCKS cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeae 123 Delayed LOCKING ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeees 123 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 123 Rear Door Security Locks eese 124 Lockout Protection cccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeees 124 Liftgate Liftglass einne 125 Power Liftgate cccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 Power Running Boards 2 00 eeeeeee 131 WIN GOW SS oie se ete ec Sane ae es seada aaia 132 Power WINdOWS c ccceseee cee eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 133 SUT AAA S10 kn 134 Theft Deterrent Systems 8 135 Content Theft Deterrent ccceceeeeeeee 135 PASS Key I iiien 137 PASS Key Ill Operation ccccceeeee 137 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 139 New Vehicle Break In lcs 139
105. people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap shoulder belts Here is how to wear one properly 54 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to VAY EN Hin aa yy aes K M l ZAG We i iD Z The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at
106. positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments Lower Anchors Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B Top Tether Anchor A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached In the United States some child restraints also have a top tether Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 75 Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anch
107. power operation Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side edges of the liftgate If an object is caught between the liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually Manual Operation of Power Liftgate To change the liftgate to manual operation toggle the switch on the overhead console to the Disable position indicated by a circle ae O With the power liftgate disabled and the door unlocked the power liftgate can be manually opened and closed To open the liftgate press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open To close the liftgate use the pull cup or pull strap to lower the liftgate and close The liftgate latch will power cinch to closed position Always close the liftgate before driving If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled the lights will flash three times but the liftgate will not move 129 It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open however if you must drive with the liftgate open the power liftgate should be switched to manual liftgate operation the overhead console switch set to the Disable position Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftg
108. quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD R or CD RW or all discs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following 1 To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 2 To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 326 Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW T
109. rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on your turn signals will not work 204 Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets you adjust the steering wheel before driving Raising it to the highest level gives more room to exit and enter your vehicle The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left side of the column To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place Turn Signal Multifunction Lever oN NIZ w The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals See Turn and Lane Change Signals on page 206 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 207 Flash to Pass See Flash to Pass on page 207 SY Windshield Wipers See Windshield Wipers on page 207 205 Windshield Washer See Windshield Washer on page 209 Rear Wiper Delay See Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 210 AJ Rear Wiper See Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 210 QO R
110. restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle out of the retractor to set the lock the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 83 5 84 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether and the position that you are using has a top tether anchor attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 74 7 Push and pull the child restraint in differ
111. right away 476 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 459 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is A CAUTION what you will see An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If possible the vehicle should be parked on a level surface Check the coolant level after the system cools down Some amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating 5 3L Engine 4 8L and 6 0L Similar Coolant Surge Tank Coolant Surge Ta
112. s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 437 Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer Basic Trailer Wiring The trailer wiring harness with a seven pin connector is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle s frame The harness connector can be plugged into a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector available through your dealer 438 The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Taillamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package Your vehicle is equipped with the seven wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer B
113. seat for a period of time e The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints e Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger s airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 85 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passenger s airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly
114. side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Spot Lifter Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts 562 Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following information e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain your vehicle s battery even if your vehicle is not operating Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 106 563 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse
115. slow down before you hit them 391 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining 392 Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through the engine s air intake and badly damage the engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water A CAUTION Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle I
116. soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of the CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism 353 Rear Side Window Antenna Your AM FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows Be sure that the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio reception Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear window defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with sharp objects Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to your antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by your warranty Because this antenna is built into your rear side window there is a reduced risk of damage c
117. steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle StabiliTrak System Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak system which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditions When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems You may hear or feel the system working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes 363 If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off usi
118. temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio you have The Parental Control feature turns off the video screen and Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature also disables all button operations from the remote control and all audio button operations from the RSA This feature can be used to gain the attention of the rear passengers that are using headphones 337 To enable Parental Control press and hold the Headphones radio power button for more than two seconds If on the radio video screen and RSA turns off If a DVD and or CD is playing it stops While Parental Control is on either a padlock icon or a text message comes on depending on the radio When the radio is turned back on the RSE system remains in Parental Control To turn off Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds The video screen and RSA returns to the state they were in before Parental Control was turned on and if the padlock icon is on the display it disappears Parental Control is also turned off by inserting or ejecting a disc by pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu or when the ignition is The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless turned off headphones that are dedicated to this system These headph
119. the DIC to warn the driver Your vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off you may still hear system noises as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 404 When the transfer case is in 4LO the stability system is automatically disabled the StabiliTrak light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the DIC Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition 365 Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle It will activate
120. the black negative cable from not touch each other or other metal the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the remote positive terminal cover if equipped to its original position Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 495 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two
121. the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Se Subtract Occupant 410 Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle The Certification Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and cras
122. the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 89 Airbag System Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger Your vehicle may also have roof mounted rollover airbags designed for either side impact or rollover deployment Roof mounted rollover airbags are available for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver and for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind that passenger If your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the ceiling above the sidewall trim near the driver s and right front passenger s window and the second row outside seating positions Also if your vehicle has a third row passenger seat you may have third row roof mounted rollover airbags Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 90 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION Yo
123. the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 387 Driving in Water A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe do not try it you probably will not get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts 388 If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 390 for more information on driving through water After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or un
124. the previews have finished although there might be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD lt Enter Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu 317 Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment
125. the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Overhead Console Buttons shown When accessing the third row seats if your vehicle has them from the outside of the vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat 31 Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 32
126. they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer Notice Spinning the wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting the transmission back and forth you can destroy the transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 530 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn the steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around the front wheels If you have a four wheel drive vehicle shift into Four Wheel High or Four Wheel Low Turn the StabiliTrak System off See StabiliTrak System on page 363 Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries it may need to be towed out Or you can use the recovery hooks if your vehicle has them If your vehicle does need to be towed out se
127. through the Driver Information Center DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for additional information Pressing the lock button may arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 135 m Unlock Press the unlock button to unlock the driver s door If the button is pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors will unlock The interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 135 lt Liftglass Press and hold this button on the RKE transmitter to open the liftglass lt Power Liftgate Press and hold this button on the RKE transmitter to open and close the liftgate The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release this button to locate your vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three t
128. to aremote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Does your vehicle have a winch If so be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck But you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different skills Here is what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds 376 With your arms hands feet and body you will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds e You approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e You have less time to react e You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles e You will need more distance for b
129. to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one e Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD forward button 3 To decrease the time or date press the left SEEK arrow or the REV reverse button or turn the tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the clock button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a six disc CD player the radio has a MENU button instead of the clock button to set the time and date To set the time and date follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the clock option displays press the pushbutton located under that label The HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minut
130. to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 497 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 498 A Fill Plug B Drain Plug If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant e When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 0 mm to 1 8 inch 3 2 mm below the filler plug hole e When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and sh
131. use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www eere energy gov afdc infrastructure locator html that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85 Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on To ensure quick starts in the wintertime the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E85 it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol 449 It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recomm
132. vehicle speakers To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary input over the speakers cycle the DVD CD Aux button on the radio faceplate until Rear Aux Input displays on the radio The RSA or DVD Screen must be on in order for the radio to source to rear auxiliary cb Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might be needed from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing so you might want to stop it or power it off DVD CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Usi
133. voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as Battery Saver Active or Service Battery Charging System If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamp
134. wind noise as driving speed changes That way the volume level should sound about the same as you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM volume label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med medium or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The tet ad times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds 295 Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped The selection displays J Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations K SEEK Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band 296 i Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 song A choice of additional informat
135. you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your headlamps For more information on the solar sensor see Sensors later in this section To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed cb On Off Press this button to turn off the climate control system Outside air will still enter the vehicle and will be directed to the floor This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi level mode The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button If you adjust the air delivery mode or temperature settings with the system off the display will illuminate briefly to show you the settings and then return off Press the on off button or the up down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button AUTO button
136. 0 Exit LIQHUAG stcisrocsterinrccbronndederneirdndwennas 220 Reading Lamps ceeecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 220 Electric Power Management 06 220 Battery Run Down Protection 221 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA mrcina ninae 222 Accessory Power Outlet S aeee 225 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 227 Climate Controls cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 227 Climate Control System eeeees 227 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 231 Outlet Adjustment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating SY SUCMM lt a cisv ssaasuiniey ania anuievaaddcuwdsssssdedvesatanieveas 239 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 240 199 Section 3 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 242 Instrument Panel Cluster eeeeeees 243 Speedometer and Odometer 008 244 Trip Odometer cccececcsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeaees 244 TACHOMOIED iarsira neiii 244 Safety Belt Reminder Light 0 05 244 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light 245 Airbag Readiness Light cee 245 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 246 Charging System Light cceeeeeeeeeee 248 Voltmeter Gage ccceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 Brake System Warning Light 249 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 251 StabiliT
137. 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Service and Miles Kilometers a Dod Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 464 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service 582 Additional Required Services cont d ies 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 g0 000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Four wheel drive Change transfer case fluid See footnote g Inspect evaporative control system An Emission Control Service See footnotes t and k Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote m 583 Maintenance Footnotes t The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recom
138. 1 When rotating your vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 for more information Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after a tire rotation See TPMS Sensor Identification Codes under Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 522 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 572 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 When It Is Time for New Tires You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true One way to tell when it e You can see the indicators at three or more is time for new tires is places around the tire sear eee e You can se
139. 2007 Chevrolet Tahoe Suburban Owner Manual Q Seats and Restraint Systems 7 Instrument Panel eee 199 Front Seals oe eecccccececccccceseeecceeseeeceeeaaeeeees 9 Instrument Panel Overview _ 008 202 Rear Seats o iiccececccccccceeseccceeseeceeeaseeeeeees 19 Climate Controls o ecceccccceeeeecceeeaaeeees 227 Safety Belts oo cecccceseeccceaaeeeceeaaaeeees 38 Warning Lights Gages and Child Restraints o o cccec eee eeeeeeeeeeee 61 INGICAIORS i ioina ae AE 242 Airbag System cicciicecedecvecaievsirssandieraetentte 90 Driver Information Center DIC 260 Restraint System Check ceeeeeeeeee 108 Audio SysteMm S oo eecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 Features and Controls _s s s s isiwisisisisws 111 Driving Your Vehicle 355 EN E EE E E E de euansatcotiontt caste 113 Your Driving the Road and Doors and Locks assesses 122 Your Vehicle sssssssssssissrisssssssrsssseses 356 OM a 132 TOWING sorana ona 417 Theft Deterrent Systems istettesennnnterennet 135 Service and Appearance Care a 441 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 139 SEVICE enaa 444 Oe Sores sgreedit a eges 162 Fuel srosasiec seostasnadoestaniecesanteccouigsaxdecehasnacwte 446 OnStar System a a a T 173 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 456 Universal Home Remote System _ 177 Rear Axle cesacisdconsdsaccheasavsceedanueacesiamasewes 496 Storage Areas asssnissssniisssrrrirssrrrne
140. 372 Driving at NIQMt ssccvcecccxcgueciteteeucssevennraagens 389 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 390 City DIVING sassa esanian ianiai aaa 393 Freeway Driving 2 ccccssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 394 Driving Your Vehicle Before Leaving on a Long Trip 396 Highway Hypnosis ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 397 Hill and Mountain Roads o an 398 Winter Driving sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 400 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud lce OF SNOW oo cccccccccceccce ceca ceeaeeeaeeeeeeeees 404 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 405 Recovery HOOKS seetsiic bcerecoosts pnceeseertctetaay 406 Loading Your Vehicle csc 407 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar EQUIPMONE seniais iira E 412 TOWING ccecce een ee es 417 Towing Your Vehicle cceeeeeeeeee eee 417 Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 418 Level Control ccccseeseeeeeeeeeaeeaeeneeneeeees 421 PU EA T E EAN 422 Towing a Trailer sceninio 422 Trailer Recommendations n 440 355 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle A CAUTION Defensive Driving Defensive driving really means Be ready for anything On city streets rural roads The best advice anyone can give about driving is or expressways it means Always expect Drive defensively the unexpected Assume that pedestrians Please start with a very important safety device in or other drivers are going to be careless your vehicle Buckle
141. Always have the rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these engine running and your vehicle in gear and take appropriate action when you go downhill e You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling Know how to go down hills The most important thing to Know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better 399 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving e Have your vehicle in good shape for winter e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 507 Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle 400 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road yo
142. Brake System Warning Light on page 249 f this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible See your dealer 276 SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer SERVICE PARK ASSIST If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 222 for more information See your dealer for service SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak
143. Bucket Seats Second Row n se 26 Third Row Seat cccc cece cece ee eee e eee eeaeee eee 33 Safety Belts icciihstienie tinge anin 38 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 38 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts riranin aaa 42 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 43 Driver POSION siicicdicsendeci viedid eee tmeceeeedeleend 43 Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment 51 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 52 Right Front Passenger Position 0 52 Center Front Passenger Position 53 Rear Seat Passengers oeenn 54 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 56 Safety Belt Pretensioners 0 cccceeeeees 60 Safety Belt Extender 60 Child Restraints cccccececeseeeeeeeeeeees 61 Older Children cccccceceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeees 61 Infants and Young Children s 64 Child Restraint Systems ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Where to Put the Restraint 0 eee 72 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children CATCHY sss scenes onctesed adering maraa 74 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position c cee cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 82 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position a 85 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position c eceeeeeeeee ees 85 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Airbag System 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
144. C as noted on the cord 143 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment near the power steering fluid reservoir 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 144 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area Active Fuel Management Your vehicle s V8 engine may have Active Fuel Management This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders depending on the driving conditions When less power is required such
145. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow etc be sure to get it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories If the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away 564 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage o O The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver s side edge of the instrument SWC BKLT__ Steering Wheel Controls Backlight _ panel Dome Lamps Driver s Side Turn LT STOP TRN
146. Load button again to cancel loading more CDs If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player While the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol appears on the CD As each new track starts to play the track number displays When more than one CD is in the radio the desired CD to be played can be changed by pressing the pushbuttons located under the displayed Disc label The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player
147. Locking Rear Axle ecccseeeeeeeeneeeeeeaneeeees 363 Lockout Protection ccseeeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeees 124 Locks Delayed Locking ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 DOOR a isshavunees E a AEA 122 Lockout Protection ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 124 Power DOOM sisctaissasecnssastindecsaathesdvaassanccans 123 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 123 Rear Door Security Locks eee 124 Loss Of Control Sarine ans ETE 371 Low Fuel Warning Light 260 L ggage Carrier sini is cenbecsestverssareneecdeaseansdens 191 Lumbar Power Gontrols sisiec vexsecieeseaisdensartaiess tients 11 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services 55 582 At Each Fuel Fill a e 586 At Least Once a Month cccceeeeeee ees 587 At Least Once a Year ccecce 587 INtFOCUCTION Loo E eae ee ee A 576 Maintenance Footnotes ccccceeseeeees 584 Maintenance Record cccecceseeeeee ee eeees 594 Maintenance Requirements 576 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ceeeseeeeeeees 592 Maintenance Schedule cont Owner Checks and Services 00065 586 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 590 Scheduled Maintenance cccceeeees 579 USING asa eens eedenea ieee antiaieys 577 Your Vehicle and the Environment 576 Malfunction Indicator Light eee 253 Manual Seats cccccccccecece cece ceueeeueeeaeeeeeeeas 9 Memo
148. Manual Reclining Seatbacks outboard side of the seat s A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving A To recline the seatback do the following CAUTION 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to the desired position If the seatback is not locked it could then release the lever to lock the seatback move forward in a sudden stop or crash in place That could cause Injury to The person 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it sitting there Always push and pull on the is locked seatback to be sure it is locked i 15 To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control e To recline the seatback tilt the top of the control rearward To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of the control forward A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion
149. N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle DRIVE D This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 56 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 56 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down DRIVE D can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 371 THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving However it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE D without using your brakes You can use THIRD 3 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on 147 SECOND 2 This position reduces vehicle speed even more than THIRD 3 without using your brakes You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your
150. OR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 123 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock 282 DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System O
151. R or CD RW should begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays If playing a CD R or CD RW the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If alabel is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD ata time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a pers
152. Radio with CD and DVD Player Instrument Panel XM Radio Messages ccecce 335 Navigation Radio System ceeeeeeeees 337 Rear Seat Entertainment System 337 Rear Seat Audio RSA o e 348 Theft Deterrent Feature ccce 350 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 351 Radio ROCEDUUON aise cheeses ssibeessevenereseivieeees 352 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 0 353 Care of the CD and DVD Player 353 Rear Side Window Antenna 00068 354 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 354 201 Instrument Panel Overview United States version shown Canada similar 202 Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 238 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 205 Instrument Panel Cluster See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 243 Hazard Warning Flasher Button See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 204 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 145 Tow Haul Selector Button If Equipped See Tow Haul Mode on page 149 Driver Information Center Controls See Driver Information Center DIC on page 260 Audio System See Audio System s on page 290 Exterior Lamps Control See Exterior Lamps on page 215 Dome Lamp Override Button See Dome Lamp Override on page 219 Automatic Transfer Case Control If Equipped See Four Wheel Drive on page 150 Cruise Contro
153. SS Key Ill Operation ccccccccceeeeeee 137 Power Door LOCKS sasaaina 123 Electrical Systemi ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 564 LINQ Ate noier E E els 127 Lumbar Controls cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 11 Retained Accessory RAP cssc 141 Running Boards ceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 OAL E E E 10 Steering Fluid seseseiiesinicrsnniionnnriiina 484 WHINGOWS riinaisanhian aaae 133 Pretensioners Safety Belt 0 eeeeeeeeeee 60 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 123 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 42 PRAGIOS eiiean aa A Aa 290 Care of Your CD and DVD Player 353 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 353 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual 0085 337 Radio wih CD wsscisssevsesavrcddasaveteceaivnees 294 Radio with CD and DVD cceeeees 305 Rear Seat AUdiIO 00 0 ececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 348 Setting the Time 60 291 292 293 Theft Deterrent cc ceceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 350 Understanding Reception eee 352 Rainsense Wipers eceeceeeeeeeee neers 208 Reading Lamps secvsceciecincecsetennessenietiedsienieedes 220 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating SYSTEM riria aera ianao aiis 239 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 240 R ar Axle cervi dininrodinnii ennn NEVA 496 LOCKING oreiro enna EEOAE REEE 363 R
154. Sidewall Labeling on page 508 for additional information 524 A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size brand and type tires on all wheels Your vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle When new your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on your vehicle it will not affect vehicle handling A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed
155. System on page 337 for more information 318 The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button gt Il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displays on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode lt Group P Press this button to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus 2 Audio Stream Press this button to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD A disc There is not any type of notification for the customer to see through the radio display but VSM has a text field that shows audio stream changing Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and show Loading Disc on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to b
156. T TWIST SAFETY SWITCH 7 BELT WHEN ATTACHING PROTECT TURN FUSE EYES BY FASTEN SIGNALS BATTERY BOX SHIELDING SEAT AIRBAG CHARGING E ACCESS T SYSTEM PERIS PARKING x re MOVE SEAT r DO NOT INSTALL LAMPS ENGINE DE FULLY a AREAR FACING COOLANT I E REARWARD gu Lo CHILD RESTRAINT FAN SECURE IN THIS SEATING HAZARD BURNS CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT P AVOID ULL BELT e DO NOT INSTALL A SPARKS OR OUT FORWARD FACING DAYTIME FLAMES COMPLETELY _ THEN SECURE y5 CHILD RESTRAINT RUNNING ENGINE OIL OWNER Cli CHILD SEAT IN THIS SEATING LAMPS PRESSURE MANUAL SPARK OR POSITION FLAME COULD A ANTIZTOCK SERVICE gt DOOR LOCK EXPLODE power My UNLOCK BRAKE MANUAL BATTERY WINDOW ma SYSTEM Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats 0 ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeaeeeuees 9 Manual Sats eisceccacnceecticnecea fcchtentatdenaisanetteoan 9 P wer Seals scsesietseaeitesci cies Maecenas 10 Power LUMb a cccccccccc eredera anien daas 11 Heated Seats cccccceccceccceeeceseeeeeaeeeaeeeaees 12 Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals 13 Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeee areas 15 Head Restraints ccccecceceee eee ee eee eee ea eees 18 C nter Seat enina a aA 19 Rear Seats cccccccccccceccceeeceseeeeeeaeeaeeeaees 19 Heated Seats irienna 19 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second ROW codec cccdeeses feensceeesteey Augers scans 20
157. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear 95 When Should an Airbag Inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down 96 In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 25 mph 29 to 40 km h The threshold
158. The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean So be sure to keep your vehicle s rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 557 If the DIC still displays the PARKING ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the bumper and driving forward at a speed of at least 15 mph 25 km h see your dealer e Other conditions that may affect system performance include vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with URPA performance e When URPA is disabled without driver action and the driver attempts to turn URPA back on by pressing the rear park aid button the indicator light will flash for 3 seconds and then stay lit to indicate that URPA is off As always drivers should use care when backing up a vehicle Always look behind you being sure to check for other vehicles obstructions and blind spots For Driver Information Center messages related to URPA see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 If the vehicle bumper is damaged the URPA system may not work properly Take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio The outlet can accept electrical equipment up to a maximum of 20 amperes There are four accessory power outlets There
159. This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE This message displays if a problem occurs with the four wheel drive system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the four wheel drive system needs service See your dealer SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 and Airbag System on page 90 for more information 275 SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 248 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See
160. To adjust bass midrange or treble press the tune knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the tune knob until the speaker control labels display Press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highli
161. To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q ve N fi l ay KASS Ao 6 3 e S K A Nj 45 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body Ses ss f LIN A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way 46 Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the l
162. Trak System sececesoscachesdacnesesocckossseease 363 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 0 0ccccceee 252 Starting Your Engine eessen 141 SLSSMING caiincissdutensatvebecaehinhiesabeanereeaseyaedasbsees 367 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 351 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel cee 204 Storage Areas Cargo Management System 06 194 Center Console Storage Area 2005 190 Cupholder S ceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeeeeeees 190 GIOVE BOX sursin a 190 Luggage Caret a1 nnd diet Hats 191 Rear Seat Armrest ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 192 Rear Storage Area c sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 404 SUM VISOS ssdececsssvedercssiverecasnidecedaas ceed caavvenes 134 SUMOOL seses rinkan ine AA 197 System Identification Universal Home Remote System cceccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee 177 T TAGCHOMELCN sxscnccissssesertansnwageaseeuintensseeddtaadenets 244 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up LAMPS e cc ciccccaveecnweeeeteeeees 502 632 Theft Deterrent Radio ccccceceseeeeeeeees 350 Theft Deterrent Systems 0 ceeeeeeeeeee 135 Content Theft Deterrent eeee 135 PASS Key U4 o cccceccsceccsscsecsseeeesseeeeees 137 PASS Key Ill Operation cccccccceee 137 Third ROW Seat scsscntitiinee ntti 33 Tilt Wheel se echt ede renee faccaenedeedsdesesueens song eau 204 Ti
163. V8 engine VIN Code 0 or the 5 3L V8 engine VIN Code 3 you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 also see Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 449 In all other engines use only regular unleaded gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 in Canada Some gasolines may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT General Motors recommends against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 448 for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance
164. Wheel Drive High position You must wait for the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your transmission into gear Notice Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case To help avoid damaging your vehicle always wait for the Four Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing before shifting the transmission into gear The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four Wheel Drive Low and Four Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL while the engine is running 154 If the knob is turned to the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High switch position when your vehicle is in gear and or moving the Four Wheel Drive High AUTO or Two Wheel Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph 5 km h and the transmission is in NEUTRAL N Shifting into NEUTRAL To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll 2 Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal See Parking Brake on page 156 for more information 3 Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN 4 Put the transmission in NEUTRAL N 5 Shift the transfer case to Two Wheel Drive High 6
165. When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all 377 Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving on page 357 378 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how wel
166. You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem Security Light f This light flashes when the vehicle security system is activated 258 Fog Lamp Light 0 The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 218 for more information The fog lamp light will come on when the fog lamps are in use Cruise Control Light This light comes on y whenever you set the cruise control The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 211 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 207 for more information Tow Haul Mode Light This light is displayed when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 422 and Tow Haul Mode on page 149 Fuel Gage E D United States Canada The fuel gage when the ignition is on tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel and you should get more fuel as soon as possible When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information 259 Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel
167. a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in acceleration braking handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control See Hitches
168. acity Filter A1518C Standard Filter A1519C Oil Filter PF48 Spark Plugs 41 985 Wiper Blades Front 21 6 inches 55 0 cm Rear 11 8 inches 30 0 cm A1518C high capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted 592 Engine Drive Belt Routing 593 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 576 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 586 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Maintenance I or z Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information 598 Reporting Safety Defects ee 615 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 598 Reporting Safety Defects to the Online Owner Center 0 ccceceeeneeeeeeees 601 United States Government 008 615 Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the Telephone TTY Users ccce 602 Canadian Government 0 eceeees 615 Customer Assistance Offices 0 0 602 Reporting Safety Defects to Gen
169. active with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc 350 When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function enter Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOCKED displays Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls they could differ depending on your vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following V A Next Previous Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite When a CD DVD is playing press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or previous track or chapter Mute Voice Recognition Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only The audio of the wireless and wired headphones if your vehicle has these features does not mute Press and release this button again to turn the sound on If your vehicle has t
170. ad Error A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT problems e It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There could have been a problem while burning the CD e The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message appears on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337
171. adio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack However an external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in PARK P See Defensive Driving on page 356 for more information on driver distraction 304 To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers cb Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might be needed from the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing so you might want to stop it or turn it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing Press this button again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is n
172. ady to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 588 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park P Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut Service Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear corrosion cracks loss of lubricant or other damage Check the hold open ability of gas strut If necessary replace with genuine GM parts Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can col
173. after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention 100 Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and flash the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors again turn the interior lamps off and turn off the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 609 e Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag system Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer for service Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger
174. age 259 and Fuel on page 446 for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC 273 LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 459 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer See Engine Oil on page 459 274 PARK ASSIST OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system after the vehicle has been started this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA syst
175. ains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 523 514 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 527 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing e Too much heat Tire overloading e Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following
176. airbag status indicator on the overhead console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to RUN or START OFF ON PASSENGER AIRBAG l A wy A A United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 246 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger s airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding ina rear facing infant seat a child riding ina forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat 101 Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child sea
177. and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more information Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available 315 See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information cb Power Press this knob to turn the radio on or off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and to start the parental control feature Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol appears
178. and Brake Pedal If your vehicle has this feature you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals This feature is designed for shorter drivers since the pedals cannot move farther away from the standard position but can move toward the driver for better pedal reach S gt Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in REVERSE R or while using the cruise control Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows pedal settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 13 for more information Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18
179. and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark 472 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing the pressure cap make sure it is hand tight and fully seated Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice lf the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on location Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 252 In addition you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 473 If Steam Is Coming From Your En
180. ansportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 527 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 SPEC 2012 MS TAGE 1 ato xX 2 Yr 760 l vA ESS DOT yy LO ce 14 re S log So T 4 me F A Be Hoe 7 b SGA S Lov agnis i Zy F a yy Colas Mais C YOT 100 S Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more de
181. anty related vehicle disablement while en route and over 250 kilometres from original point of departure you may qualify for trip interruption expense assistance This assistance covers reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum of 500 Canadian for A meals maximum of 50 day B lodging maximum of 100 night and C alternate ground transportation maximum of 40 day This benefit is to assist you with some of the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be repaired Pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair order are required Once authorization has been given your advisor will help you make any necessary arrangements and explain how to claim for trip interruption expense assistance 605 Alternative Service Canada only There may be times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely assistance your advisor may authorize you to secure local emergency road service and you will be reimbursed up to 100 upon submission of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Chevrolet s Bumper to Bumper warranty and the duration of the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadian customers of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty However any cost for parts and labor for non warranty repairs are the responsibility of the driver For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadsid
182. ap belt and apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 47 Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong place 48 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this A The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen 49 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it ies Ke A P A The belt is twisted across the
183. ar Safety Belt 56 COMPASS earr E 162 166 Content Theft Deterrent ceeees 135 Control of a Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 360 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage ceeee 252 Heater Engine cccceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 Surge Tank Pressure Cap cesce 473 Cooling SySteM 0 c cteciereee ceeiesiearteeee 477 Cruise Control ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 211 Cruise Control Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 258 Cupholder s sirensis 190 622 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation seses 607 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 0 eeeeees 602 Customer Assistance Offices 00 602 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 598 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 603 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 615 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 00ccceeeeees 615 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 05 615 Roadside Assistance Program 00 604 Service Publications Ordering INFOrmation 2 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 616 D Daytime Running Lamps ceeeeeeeeeeeees 216 Defensive Driving cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 356 Delayed LOCKING oi ccisviesieteccdsieveoed asvianrvees 123 DiSC MP3 oo cece cecceeeeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 321 327 Doing Yo
184. ard Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward automatically 23 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Automatic Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in PARK P for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the Se ee el seat when someone is sitting in the seat Button similar could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one When accessing the third row seats if your oe A vehicle has them from the outside of the A eN a E ihg vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the To fold and tumble the seat do the following seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front There will be a slight delay between the folding of or on the seat of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 24 Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following A safety belt that is improperly routed n
185. are two under the climate controls one on the back of the floor console and a additional accessory power outlet in the rear cargo area on the passenger side 225 To use the power outlet lift the spring cap and insert electrical 12V device plug To close the power outlet remove 12V electrical device plug and the spring cap will close The accessory power outlets are powered even with the ignition off Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is off may cause the vehicle s battery to run down Notice If electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet the battery may drain causing your vehicle not to start or damage to the battery This would not be covered by the warranty Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off your vehicle Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power plugs 226 Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipme
186. arging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for improved fuel economy and battery life The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading this is normal Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create full power If there is a problem with the battery charging system this light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 and Charging System Light on page 248 for more information Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light will come on when you set the parking brake If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds
187. arm If the alarm does not sound when it should but the vehicle s headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 564 If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle s headlamps do not flash see your dealer for service PASS Key IIl The PASS Key IIl system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle PASS Key Ill Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system This mean
188. as a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the set reset button for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc If the retro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of miles mi or kilometers km that were driven during the last ignition cycle Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of f
189. as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris 311 Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp CD Eject Press and release the CD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 312 amp DVD Eject Press and release th
190. as cruising at a constant vehicle speed the system will operate in the half cylinder mode allowing your vehicle to achieve better fuel economy When greater power demands are required such as accelerating from a stop passing or merging onto a freeway the system will maintain full cylinder operation Your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management indicator For more information on using this display see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 Automatic Transmission Operation There are several different positions for the shift lever Your vehicle has an automatic transmission with an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster This display will show the position anytime the shift lever is moved out of PARK P 145 PARK P This position locks your rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shif
191. as enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too 493 494 Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle wit
192. as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door in the first or second row seats or the rear windows in the third row seat if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags 91 There is an airbag i readiness light on the CAUTION e instrument panel cluster which shows the Anyone who is up against or very close FY airbag symbol to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best The system checks the airbag electrical system for protection for adults but not for young malfunctions The light tells you if there is an children and infants Neither the vehicle s electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on safety belt system nor its airbag system is page 245 for more information designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 61 or Infants and Young Children on page 64 Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door in the first or second row seats or the rear windows in the thir
193. asher fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for reservoir location Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full e Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 485 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the DOT 3 location of the reservoir 486 There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work a
194. ather i s seen ee ee eeaeeasaeeeeseaeeenaesees 555 Inflation Tire Pressure cccsseeeeeeee 515 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Tire Pressure Monitor System cccc0e 516 Pl sti SUMACSS sic sestisianstycecstonenceundabats 556 Tire Inspection and Rotation 0cccccee 524 Care of Safety BOIS sssscceisssaredcpelsseeereiaxeeds 556 When It Is Time for New Tires o 523 Weatherstrips riais hettittttttttitetitietetenenenenenas 556 BUYING New WES scssssnessreavsatvsansianiganslcendsen 524 Washing Your Vehicle scene 557 Different Size Tires and Wheels 526 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 557 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ccceeee 527 Finish Care EATE AEE keeeeerreteeeeen 557 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 528 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Wheel Replacement c cccccccseseeeeeeeees 528 Blades PEE EI ewe E A A E tears 558 Tir Chain cavncensetecne een etches 530 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels If A Tire Goes Flat coccccccccccccccececccccceccececeees 531 and TAM esince aa 559 Changing a Flat Tire c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 532 TURES ssc esanistadeveaseaee tes Sige teat ae EN 560 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 533 Sheet Metal Damage ccccseeeees 560 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing Finish Damage E E E E te taneeata ts 560 tie Spare Tile scsi sadcaceisansitwctsessecncaabeison 537 Underbody Maintenance ss ssssssirerieee 560 Secondary La
195. atically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To express close the sunroof fully press and release the front of the driver s side switch The sunroof will close automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed 198 Vent The sunroof has an express vent open feature From the closed position press the rear of the passenger s side switch to vent the sunroof To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the passenger s side switch To stop the sunroof partway release the switch Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then open halfway and the air deflector will raise To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Express Close or Manual Close functions described pr
196. aused by car washes and vandals 354 If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna over the grid lines XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception The performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your 1 od nee eee 356 Defensive Driving esscr 356 Drunken Driving ceessssscrrsressrrreesrrrrnsrnns 357 Control of a Vehicle smrciriiiniicisieans 360 SAMUI EAE E E devas exddchyeuseeccavrcttcnassks 360 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 008 361 Braking in Emergencies s eeeeeeeeeees 363 Locking Rear Axle c eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeees 363 StabiliTrak System cccccccccceseeeeeeceeee 363 DIGCCHING siiderin terete ennari e tees 367 Off Road ReCOVETY cccceeeeeeteteeeteeeeeeees 369 PASSING sa diee iar cen E T E bess tens dake 369 Loss of Control wsiccissstrvcustarrseinestiien 371 Off Road Driving ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
197. ax a You can select different climate control settings for the driver and passengers Driver s Side Temperature Control The driver s side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver s side The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The driver side temperature display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing 231 Passenger s Side Temperature Control The passenger s temperature buttons can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The passenger side display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing The passenger s temperature setting can be set to match the driver s temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and
198. ay be able to get them right by moving some items around in the trailer Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 lbs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a GVWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg and a GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg GCWR Vehicle Weight Trailer Rating 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 386 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 lbs 578 kg Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 lbs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 lbs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 lbs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg 429 But let s sa
199. ay be too much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of your vehicle Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on your vehicle e Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each For the front axle if more cargo or passengers must be carried appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving e Follow the snow plow manufacturer s recommendations regarding rear ballast Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating 413 e The snow plow manufacturer or installer can The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle assist you in determining the amount of rear can be found in the lower right corner of the ballast required to help make sure your Certification Tire label as shown snowplow vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating the front and rear axle ratings TRUCK o 9 and the front and rear weight distribution ratio Pans e The total vehicle must not exceed the GYW COLD TIRE PRESSURE rating XXXKPA XXPSI COLD TIRE PRESSURE XXXKPA XXPSI PRESSION A FROID E INFORMATION F XXX T XXXX What is front axle reserve capacity and how do calculate it XXXXXXKX XXPSI MP AV F XK T XXX J R F
200. be basic rules for protecting the environment seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads e Always use established trails roads and areas inside the cargo area not on the roof that have been specially set aside for public Keep cargo in the cargo area as far off road recreational driving obey all forward and low as possible posted regulations e Avoid any driving practice that could damage There are some important things to remember prea ida ie eR Ue eh fee abontipo 10 load your Venice wheel spinning breaking down trees or e The heaviest things should be on the load unnecessary driving through streams or over floor and forward of your rear axle Put soft ground heavier items as far forward as you can Always carry a litter bag make sure all e Be sure the load is secured properly so refuse is removed from any campsite driving on the off road terrain does not before leaving toss things around Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it e Take extreme care with open fires where You will find other important information in this permitted camp stoves and lanterns manual See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 and Tires on page 507 e Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 375 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going
201. be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed 264 Transmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel Management Indicator If your vehicle has this display press the trip fuel button until INST ECONOMY V8 MODE displays This display shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and will change frequently as driving conditions change This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km Unlike average economy this screen cannot be reset An Active Fuel Management indicator will display on the right side of the DIC while INST ECONOMY displays on the left side Active Fuel Management allows the engine to operate on either four or eight cylinders depending on your driving demands When Active Fuel Management is active V4 MODE will display on the DIC When Active Fuel Management is inactive V8 MODE will display S
202. belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Lift the release lever located on the bottom rear of the seatback on the outboard side of the seat and the seatback will fold forward 33 Unfolding the Seatback s To tumble the seat do the following To return the seatback to the upright position do 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the following the seat 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for 2 Make sure the head rests are completely the seat lowered there is nothing under in front of m or on the seat and all items are removed from 2 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the the cupholder and storage bin if the seat is upright position a two passenger seat 3 Fold the seatbacks forward using the Z CAUTION instructions previously listed under Folding the Seatbacks You will not be able to unlatch 3 the seat from the floor unless the seatback If the seatback is not locked it could is folded down move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 4 Unlatch the seat from the floor by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle on the rear of the seat near the bottom 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
203. body 50 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash To move it down squeeze the buttons A on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to make sure it has locked into position 51 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy 52 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt i
204. bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 529 Tire Chains A CAUTION If your vehicle has P265 65R18 or P275 55R20 size tires do not use tire chains They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction
205. bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing the button the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds Cleaning the Mirror Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you The mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow areas The use of hood mounted air deflectors and add on convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror performance Outside Trailer Tow Mirrors If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the objects behind you Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer These mirrors can be manually folded forward or rearward The lower portion of the mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver s preferred position for better vision Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which help clear them of condensation snow and ice When the rear window defogger button is pressed the heated mirrors are also turned on Only the upper glass of the mirror is h
206. bs 3 220 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg Models 4 10 8 100 Ibs 3 674 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 6000 V8 Extended Moda 8 100 Ibs 3 674 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg K 1500 4WD Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR menos 3 73 6 700 Ibs 3 039 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 4 10 7 700 Ibs 3 493 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 5300 V8 Extended 3 73 7 000 Ibs 3 175 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg Models 4 10 8 000 Ibs 3 629 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 6000 V8 E ieee 7 900 Ibs 3 583 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 426 C 2500 2WD Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 6000 V8 Extended 3 73 7 700 Ibs 3 493 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Models 4 10 9 700 Ibs 4 400 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg K 2500 4WD Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 6000 V8 Extended 3 73 7 500 Ibs 3 402 kg 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Models 4 10 9 500 Ibs 4 309 kg 16 000 Ibs 7 257 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is You can ask your dealer for our trailering the total allowable weight of the completely information or advice or you can write us at the loaded vehicle and trailer including any address listed in your Warranty and Owner passengers cargo equipment and conversions Assistance Information Booklet The GCWR for your vehicle should not be In Canada write to exceeded General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 427 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important wei
207. button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD When the DVD is playing depending on the radio you may be able to do slow play by pressing the pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode You may also depending on the radio perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button kd Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 4 Fast Reverse Press this button to quickly reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button may not
208. by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which make take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the 9 10 Proceed to the driver s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the drivers side rear tire the horn chirp will sound two more times to signal the tire learning mode is no longer active Turn the ignition switch to LOCK sensor identification code has been matched 11 to this tire and wheel position To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key 7 Proceed to the passenger s side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 8 Proceed to the passenger s side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label 12 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor If you replace one of the road tires with the spare the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on the DIC screen This message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor 520 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
209. c Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving e When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C At high speed for quite a while e In heavy traffic especially in hot weather e While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it is colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 8 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatur
210. cations to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 178 Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode LED indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps Keep the original hand held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in section When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming It is recommended that a new bat
211. ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 61 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position 0 cccceeeeeeee neces 82 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position 00 85 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ee 85 Where to Put the Restraint 0 72 Cigarette Lighter rencrien 227 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 559 Exterior Lamps Lenses 557 Fabric Ganpet nassssirrara iiini a 554 Finish Care assssssssssssssrrressrrrrrrsrrrrssrnrne 557 Inside of Your Vehicle ceeeeeeees 553 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces ecenin 556 Leaner 2 seicsintesitner hana ddteanis 555 TIES aratsean owner alae a aA 560 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeee 560 Washing Your Vehicle cecce 557 621 Cleaning cont Weatherstrips cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeereees 556 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades cseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 558 Climate Control System ceeeeeeeees 227 Dual Automatic ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 231 Outlet Adjustment 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating SYSTE terse theieeten Dee cead eee ia cee neta 239 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Electronic cccceeceeeeeee eens 240 GIOCK asiani sanita aaas 291 292 293 Collision Damage Repair 0 eeeeee 610 Comfort Guides Re
212. ces The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start Once two remote starts or a single remote start with one time extension has been done the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for additional information If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see your dealer to enable or disable the remote vehicle start system Remote Start Ready If your vehicle does not have the rem
213. ched and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made 289 Audio System s Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience See Defensive Driving on page 356 By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle s audio system you can use it with less effort as well as take advantage of its features While your vehicle is parked set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them 290 A CAUTION This system provides you with a far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving While your vehicle is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its controls e Familiarize yourself with its operation e Set up your audio system by presetting y
214. cise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 397 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain 398 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Off Road Driving on page 372 for information about driving off road e Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads A CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope e Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane A CAUTION roads in hills or mountains Do not swing wide i or cut across the center of the road Drive at J a j speeds that let you stay in your own lane Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with i e As you go over the top of a hill be alert There the ignition off is dangerous The brakes could be something in your lane like a stalled will have to do all the work of slowing car or an accident down They could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash
215. cking behind your vehicle The URPA display is located near the passenger side rear window and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder The URPA display has three color coded lights The lights are used to provide distance and system information along with beeps that will be heard through the speakers URPA can be turned off by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio The indicator light will come on to indicate that URPA is off The red light in the URPA display will also be lit if the vehicle is in REVERSE R If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC PARKING ASSIST OFF will display on the screen URPA automatically turns back on each time the vehicle is started How the System Works When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R the rear display will briefly come on to let you know the display is operating correctly URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R The system does not work at a reverse speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h To remind you of this the red light on the rear display will flash 223 How the System Works when Backing If the shift lever is in REVERSE R URPA detects objects close to the rear bumper The first time an object is detected a single beep will sound If an object is detected ata REVERSE R speed between 0 mph 0 km h and 5 mph 8 km h the following describes what will occur based on your di
216. cle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow Always put the shift lever fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued lf the transfer case on four wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you e start your engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it
217. coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 481 3 482 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 6 Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure steps 1 through 6 Engine Fan Noise If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan when the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most e
218. could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section 301 A EJECT Press the CD eject button to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs J Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing K SEEK m Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds on the CD have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD 302 lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is hear
219. creen remains on this is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen The RSE overhead console contains the infrared receivers for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio with CD and DVD MP3 on page 305 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the remote control stored in a
220. ctly install the taillamp assembly 503 License Plate Lamp 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 4 Install the new bulb 5 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back up Lamp 3047 License Plate Lamp Rear Turn Signal Lamp Taillamp 3047 and Stoplamp For replacement bulbs not listed here contact 1 Remove the two screws holding each of the your dealer retailer license plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate 2 Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward through the molding opening 504 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To replace the wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 592 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and rotate the blade assembly away from the arm connector 505 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park
221. d Code garage door opener Follow the Programming instructions below for a Fixed Code garage door opener Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure 185 Follow these steps to program up to three devices 1 To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above you have a Fixed Code garage door opener If you do not see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code 186 Switch Position Your Universal Home Remote Button Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar The switch positions on your hand held transmitter may be labeled as follows e A switch in the up position may be labeled as Up or On
222. d DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 470 for more information 479 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 480 A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill
223. d at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random With the random setting the tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or all CDs ina six disc CD player To use random do one of the following e Press the CD AUX button or for a single CD player insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player A RDM label displays To play the tracks from the single CD in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play e Press the CD AUX button or for a six disc CD player press and hold the LOAD button A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to p
224. d restraint will be placed TL Second Row Seat 60 40 For models with 60 40 second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 78 ae Third Row Seat Two or Three Passenger on For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver side seating position in the third row Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for either the third row center or driver side seating position Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger position or the third row passenger side seating position if your vehicle has a third row seat if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached There is no place to attach the top tether in these positions Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in th
225. d result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put the automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL 491 Notice lf you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary access
226. d row seat if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags 92 Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 93 If your vehicle has a roof mounted rollover airbag for the driver and the person seated directly behind the driver it is located in the ceiling above the side windows 94 If your vehicle has a roof mounted rollover airbag for the right front passenger and the person directly behind that passenger it is located in the ceiling above the side windows If your vehicle has a roof mounted rollover airbag and a third row passenger seat the airbag is located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outside passenger positions in the third row A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering And if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating side impact airbag will be blocked
227. d water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 561 Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 557 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get approved cleaning products from your dealer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 561 If your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage
228. der the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving e Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you e Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles e Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your vehicle s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead e In remote areas watch for animals e f you are tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example
229. dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers retailers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles For warranty repairs during the Bumper to Bumper U S or Base Warranty Coverage period Canada provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty interim transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation program Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only at participating dealers retailers A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them k
230. dometer reset stem will also turn off or acknowledge DIC messages The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer engine hours trip odometer oil life Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system programming for vehicles with a TPM system Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming and display language If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays odometer engine hours trip odometer and display language Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Engine Hours To display the ENGINE HOURS place the ignition in LOCK or ACCESSORY then press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while viewing the ODOMETER This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run 267 Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is dis
231. dy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it arock arut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more For reasons like these you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over 385 Q What if am driving across an incline that is not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should do If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it z Stalling on an Incline A CAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 386 If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline be sure you and an
232. e The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S Passenger P Metric Tire LT245 75R16 E120 116S TTT Ty A B CDE Light Truck LT Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association A Light Truck LT Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description The service description indicates the load ran
233. e Assistance Representative e Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle 606 e Model year color and license plate number e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we are only a phone call away U S customers call Chevrolet Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 243 8872 text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Canadian customers call 1 800 268 6800 Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in their sole discretion the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Towing and Road Service Exclusions Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non public roadway or highway fines impound towing caused by a violation of local Municipal State Provincial or Federal law and mounting
234. e Roadside Assistance Program on page 604 114 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in operating range This is normal for any RKE system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check to determine if bat
235. e Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 531 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on CAUTION Continued 3 If you have a four wheel drive vehicle your hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 204 for more information A CAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack a
236. e month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the time or date setting labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD forward button 3 To decrease the time or date press the left SEEK arrow or the REV reverse button You can also turn the tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting 293 Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the MENU button Once the clock option displays press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 294 Radio with CD MP3 AM 640 9 389 mM 680 Y 750 Y 96 1Y985 X41 S EECT il cH lt i b gt BAND SEEK SEEK REV FWD CD AUX Radio with CD shown Radio with Six Disc CD similar Radio Data System RDS
237. e DVD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject J Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds on the CD have played If less than five seconds on the CD have played the previous track plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random With random tracks can be l
238. e Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter 285 The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL default The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level 286 NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remai
239. e Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 513 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread rem
240. e RSE system Adapter connectors or cables may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio with CD and DVD MP3 on page 305 for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature do the following 1 Press the display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control menu navigation arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the display menu button again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output
241. e Restore All label Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly and your vehicle must be returned to your dealer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 335 later in this section for further detail 300 Playing a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing Playing a CD s Six Disc CD Player LOAD V Press this button to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Press and release the load button 2 Wait for the message to insert the disc 3 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Press and hold the load button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the
242. e Towing Your Vehicle on page 417 405 Recovery Hooks A CAUTION These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back 406 Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle You may need to use them if you are stuck off road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
243. e cord or fabric showing through NGICAOTS When Wi the tire s rubber appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or 1 6 mm or less of tread snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric remaining Some e The tire has a bump bulge or split commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 523 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall by the tire manufacturer If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire
244. e five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 422 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips Example 1 Vehicle aay Weight ea for Example 1 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 2 Example 2 Item Description __ Tota Vehicle Capacity Weight ra for Example 2 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 750 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo Weight 250 Ibs 113 kg Available Occupant and Pe Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg 409 Example 3 Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 1 000 Ibs 453 kg Weight 200 Ibs 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 91 kg x5 Available Cargo Weight 0 Ibs 0 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of
245. e ignition all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger s door will unlock Liftgate Liftglass A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off That will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System on page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 231 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way If your vehicle has a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function See Engine Exhaust on page 160 If your vehicle has a power liftgate see Power Liftgate on page 127 125 To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 To open the liftglass press the button on the underside of the license pock
246. e instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253 Reinstall the fuel cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 451 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message displays when the system is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 for more information The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 363 for more information TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC
247. e left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous MP3 WMA file plays Press the right gt SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either the left or right gt SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 WMA files on the CD 332 lt amp Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold the lt lt REV button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release the lt lt REV button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold the b gt FWD button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release the D gt FWD button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW you are listening to in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM labe
248. e life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 253 Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awhile the emission controls might not work as well your vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired 254 This light will also come on during a malfunction in one o
249. e lock out service is provided In Canada the vehicle registration is also required Lock out service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle A remote unlock may be available if you have an active OnStar subscription Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or Highway Tow to the nearest dealership retailer for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling accident Winch out assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow e Flat Tire Change Installation of a spare tire in good condition when equipped and properly inflated is covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure Jump Start No start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge Trip Routing Service Canada only Upon request Roadside Assistance will send you detailed computer personalized maps highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination anywhere in North America along with helpful travel information pertaining to your trip We will make every attempt to send your personalized trip routing as quickly as possible but it is best to allow three weeks before your planned departure date Trip routing requests will be limited to six per calendar year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Canada only In the event of a warr
250. e of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there You can run the engine to keep warm but be Open a window just a little on the side of careful the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out 403 Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes 404 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin the wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed
251. e pressed either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the stop button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause symbol tags displayed on the radio If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press the play pause button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc Ejecting a Disc Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again In case loading and readin
252. e problem to the left or right depending on the space available 368 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle ona two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing veh
253. e rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly Ina crash the child could be seriously injured CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual A CAUTION Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor 79 A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has be
254. e side in which the a console below the door has been opened Once the door is closed CNX climate control system the running boards will automatically move back under the vehicle The vehicle must not be moving for the running boards to extend or retract The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended position 131 Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 132 Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome from extreme heat in warm or hot weather and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke CAUTION Continued When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The power window controls are located on each of the side doors Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they
255. e to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS vV TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is no longer in RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is rea
256. e transmission is not in PARK P The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only your DRL lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps will not be on The instrument panel will not be lit up either When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transaxle must be in the PARK P position before the DRL lamps can be turned off As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the automatic headlamp system will turn on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transaxle must be in the PARK P position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on Be sure it is not covered or the headlamps will come on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when d
257. e way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle s inside mirror activate the right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that if your vehicle s passenger side outside mirror is convex the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three c
258. e window for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both 70 Securing an Add on Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 74 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child
259. ealer retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer retailer Please contact your dealer retailer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer retailer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisticated computer systems that
260. ean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage may result 348 Rear Seat Audio RSA This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources However the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to except on some radios where dual control is allowed For example rear seat passengers can listen to and control a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones You can operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If your vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the RSA audio is active through the headphones C Power Press this button to turn the RSA on or off Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary K
261. ear Door Security Locks aeee 124 Rear Heated Seats cccececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 19 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 56 Rear Seat Armrest ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 629 Rear Seat Audio RSA Rear Seat Entertainment System 5 Rear Seat Passengers Safety Belts Rear Side Window Antenna sses Rear Storage Area Rear Windshield Washer Wipet 0 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with Compass and Temperature Display Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar Compass and Temperature DISDIAY soi cis octets Sse tetetevansetenodeeceteowenteats Reclining Seatbacks Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Recovery Hooks c ccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Recreational Vehicle Towing Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Remote Keyless Entry RKE System OPETALION sesdiaceccsed cose raan eR Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire es scccaciess ccvecesdacdeceavecceeacsscevvecsvects Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Replacement Bulbs Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government General Motors United States Government 630 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 108 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Retained Accessory Power RAP 0 141 Right Front Passenger Position Safety Belts i cncteiacters iasadan inneas 52 Roadside Assistance Pro
262. ear Wiper Wash See Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 210 Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically To signal a lane change raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash This will cause the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever will return by itself when it is released 206 An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and a blown fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 564 Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver I
263. ear and at this time the system must be reset Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 462 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often 579 Maintenance I Use Maintenance if the Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on previous service performed was Maintenance I within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased Always use Maintenance II whenever the message or Maintenance II was performed comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Service J Maintenance Maintenance n Change engine oil and filte
264. ear control temperature display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing The display will only indicate climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode Manual Operation A V Fan The fan buttons on the rear seat audio control panel allows you to manually adjust the fan speed To decrease airflow press the button with the fan and down arrow symbol Pressing the fan up button when the system is off will turn the system on The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control To turn the rear system off keep pressing the button with the fan and down arrow symbol 241 Increase Decrease Temperature These buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area Press the button for warmer air and press the button for cooler air 74 Mode Press the mode button to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle The pictures help to locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury 242 Warning lights
265. easure the temperature of the air inside your vehicle There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature fan speed and the air delivery mode The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog or defrost modes 43 Defog The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers This mode directs air to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When you select this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the
266. eated The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated Your mirror may also have a turn signal arrow that will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change 169 Outside Power Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with outside power mirrors the controls are located on the drivers door armrest Press A to select the driver s side mirror or B to select the passenger s side mirror Press either A or B again to deselect the mirror 170 To adjust each mirror press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want it to go Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle The mirrors may also include a memory function that works with the memory seats See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 13 for more information The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle To return the mirror to its original position push outward Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving If the mirrors are accidentally folded unfolded manually they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded position If this happens you will need to reset the mirrors See Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors next Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Yo
267. ecorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp CD Eject Press and release the amp CD button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the amp CD button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 331 amp DVD Eject Press and release the amp DVD button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject J Tune Turn the Jd knob to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing K SEEK m Press th
268. ed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 422 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 139 Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different positions A LOCK This position locks the ignition and transmission It is a theft deterrent feature You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to LOCK 140 Notice Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is all the way in If it is turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard If none of this works then your vehicle needs service B ACCESSORY This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the ACCESSORY ignition position and the RUN po
269. ed down to get an accurate reading 468 4 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 Using a funnel add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section e When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then
270. ee Active Fuel Management on page 145 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 You should change your oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 459 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 462 Units Press the vehicle informat
271. ee DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 and Engine Oil on page 459 for more information A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure Check your oil as soon as possible A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Oil Pressure Light This light will come on briefly when you start your engine A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 257 That is a check to be sure the light works If it does not come on be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong When the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly
272. eees 508 Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp 5 218 DOME ccniriiiroii eirinen E O 219 Dome Lamp Override n 219 Sea a E T 215 POGI ea 220 LATCH System Child Restraints c ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 74 Level Control arristassi 421 License Plate Lamps accenni 504 Liftgate POWe r ocisninres ioeina asi neadan i 127 Liftgate Liftglass soraciconiriorrasironiiinases 125 Liftglass Liftgate serereniecnnno 125 626 Light Airbag Readiness ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 245 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 251 Brake System Warning a se 249 Charging System sissiriissinias tiinas 248 Cruise Control xiccenrtteineinennt en ae 258 OG LAMI aoe nanen cent EE NEE 258 Highbeam On ssisccisretteendvieitaenahes 259 Low Fuel Warning c ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 260 Malfunction Indicator ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 253 Oil Pressure cece cece eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeees 257 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 246 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder 245 Safety Belt Reminder cceeeeees 244 SECUN cette en 258 StabiliTrak Indicator cceeeeeeeeneteees 252 Tire PrOSSUPG soctsacswecestssavcessastien can tvenenansexs 253 Tow Haul Mode ccceeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 259 Lighting ENUY gaceteawet code ewatesaidte sco taweccecssancceturesueca 220 XIE seecanestay sects aceess sasceetecceaneets ade eeesesseess 220 Loading Your Vehicle aaaeei 407
273. eees 90 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeees 93 When Should an Airbag Inflate 96 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 98 How Does an Airbag Restrain 00 99 What Will You See After an Airbag INTALSS 2 ainiaan aaae 99 Passenger Sensing System a 101 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Restraint System Check 000008 Checking the Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 106 To move a manual seat Front Seats forward or rearward Manual Seats ZN CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving 2 Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Power Seats Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown On a vehicle with power seats the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats To adjust the seat do any of the following Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e Ra
274. eep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion 379 Driving Uphill e Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill ti oa Sad turne Jau mign wantto you need to take some special steps e daeta fi l th e Ease up on your speed as you approach the se a low gear and get a firm grip on the top of the hill steering wheel i Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more See moo sia aman visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills maintain your speed Do not use more power than you need because you do not want e Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there the wheels to start spinning or sliding e Use your headlamps even during the day They make your vehicle more visible to AN CAUTION oncoming traffic A CAUTION Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert 380 Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or A
275. ehicle so it will be there if you ever need it while you are on the road If you sell the vehicle leave this manual with the vehicle Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 2006 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If this is done it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Do Not Do Not do this or D
276. el blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut C counterclockwise A Jack B Wheel Blocks C Jack Handle The tools you will be using include the following D Jack Handle Extensions E Wheel Wrench To access the spare tire refer to the following graphics and instructions Hoist Assembly Hoist Shaft Hoist Shaft Access Cover Hole Jack Handle Extensions Wheel Wrench Hoist Cable G H K Tire Retainer Spare Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down Hoist Shaft Access Hole Hoist End of Extension Tool Spare Tire Lock Open the hoist shaft access door C on the bumper to access the spare tire lock K Insert the ignition key turn it clockwise and then pull it to remove the spare tire lock Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 535 4 Insert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft access hole Be sure the hoist end J of the extension D connects to the hoist shaft B The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire 5 Turn the wheel wrench E counterclockwise to lower the spare tire H to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary La
277. els allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 518 The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and low tire pressure light telltale will come on each time the vehicle is started until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure The Tire and Loading Information label tire information placard shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 For the location of the tire and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Your vehicle s TPMS can alert you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 and Tires on page 507 Notice Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver s side front tire passengers side front tire passengers side rear tire and drivers side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your GM dealer for service The TPMS sensors may a
278. em has been turned off Press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 222 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 and DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 for more information REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
279. en installed Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer Notice Contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly 80 Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the seat When removing the child restraint always remember to return the safety belts to their normal stowed position before folding the rear seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if the vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the followin
280. ended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than three gallons 11 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles 11 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 451 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle s fuel system Damage caused by additives would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty 450 Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To
281. ent directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint if the top tether is attached to the top tether anchor disconnect it Unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position A CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger s airbag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat Do not use child restraints in this position The restraints will not work properly Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72 In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear facing infant seat or a small child in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat is detected See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 246 for more information on this including important safety information 85 A label on your sun visor says Ne
282. ent Option Upfitter Circuit Breaker Usage Circuit Breaker Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out 567 ENG EXH saa i aa e C39 aes a C7 C8 C97 C103 C11JIHDLP C129 C139 C143 ea C15 FANCNTRL 4g LOHID C475 C189 C199 C207 C219 C223 J C23 C24 C25 C26 7 EZI Eag cat AC a FUEL 4 C313 CMPRSR strTR FWR PMP PRK LAMP B C329 C333 C349 3 C359 o c37 C379 C389 0 C393 C40 C419 C429 C439 C449 71 C459 C463 C479 C489 C499 C509 C513 C52 C53 C543 C559 REAR Left Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Electronic Stability Suspension Engine Controls Control Automatic Level Control Engine Control Module Throttle Exhaust Control i Right Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Right Side 14 Transmission Control Module Battery Vehicle Back up Lamps 16 Passenger s Side Low Beam Headlamp Air Conditioning Compressor Left Side 29 Passenger s Side High Beam Headlamp 569 Fuses Usage Key Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Fuses Usage 44 Liftgate Release 45 OnStar Rear Seat Entertainment Display 46 47 48 Auxiliary Climate Control Ignition Compass Temperature Mirror 50 51 Airbag System Battery 52
283. enter and on the side of your instrument panel to direct the airflow 238 Operation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather press the fan up button to the maximum fan level before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your window Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle such as hood air deflectors may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System If your vehicle has this system the rear controls are three knobs located in the headliner The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls To turn the system on press the AUX button on the front climate control system an indicator will be lit Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear system on in a mimic mode In this mode the airflow in the rear will be approximately the same direction temperature and fan speed as the front Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear
284. er caps are on properly Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches 152 mm from the closed position pause then push the front center of the hood with a swift firm motion to fully close the hood 457 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 5 3L engine 4 8L and 6 0L similar here is what you will see fee Ate iss 458 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 464 Air Filter Restriction Indicator If Equipped See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 464 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 477 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 473 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 491 Battery See Battery on page 490 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 459 Automatic Transmission Dipstick See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 466 Remote Negative Terminal Out of View See Jump Starting on page 491 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 459 Engine Cooling Fan See Cooling System on page 477 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 484 L Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 486 M Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 567
285. er s sisriiscsranen aiena 190 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 172 Center Console Storage Area cc0e 190 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors 172 Luggage Carrier eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 191 Outside Convex Mirror neeese 173 Rear Storage Area c cecscscssesesesssseseseeeseee 192 Outside Heated Mirrors 1 0 0 173 Rear Seat Armrest 2 2 0vcsarmuceaccutewe 192 OnStar System Arctianarindnormmnedun 173 Cargo COVEN saiisine tetyin teari 192 Cargo Management System 194 SUNOOT saiia ton ees Soe EAA 197 112 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children 113 Your vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition all door locks and the spare tire hoist lock if your vehicle has one If you ever lose your keys your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements Notice If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM Roadside Assistance Center Se
286. eral GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 603 MOOLS riseiras 615 Roadside Assistance Program c e 604 Service Publications Ordering Information 616 Courtesy Transportation eeeeeees 607 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 609 Collision Damage Repair 0 ccee 610 597 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer retailer and to Chevrolet Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s retailer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership retailer management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership retailer or the general manager 598 STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership retailer management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership retailer without further help in the U S contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 222 1020 In Canada contact General Moto
287. erloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 528 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment may need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel
288. ert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 You should change your oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 459 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 462 Relearn Tire Positions To access this display the vehicle must be in PARK P If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor the system must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information Relearn Remote Key To access this display the vehicle must be in PARK P This display allows you to match Re
289. es If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start the climate control system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off During a remote start if your vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to RUN If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start you will need to manually turn the heated seats on and off See Heated Seats on page 12 for additional information Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As aresult you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 114 for additional information 119 Q Remote Start Press and release the lock button and the
290. es and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 598 Q Because have a disability have to get A my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module rollover sensor module steering wheel instrument panel overhead console ceiling headliner ceiling and pillar garnish trim roof mounted rollover airbag modules or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Cus
291. es are 50 F 10 C or more If it is colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level 467 Checking the Fluid Level See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on location 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Prepare your vehicle as follows 1 Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P 4 Let the engine run at idle for three minutes DA Sa or more o ERTS Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again The transmission dipstick handle with this l aa graphic is located at 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the the rear of the engine lower level The fluid level must be in the compartment on COLD area below the cross hatched area for the passenger s side of a cold check or in the HOT or cross hatched the vehicle area for a hot check Be sure to keep the dipstick point
292. ese wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes 559 Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protect
293. esseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 10 Reclining Seatbacks airneisi 15 Third ROW Seat cceccccceceeeceeesneeeeeeaaaeeees 33 Secondary Latch System c eeeeeeee 543 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position ceee 85 Rear Seat Position 0 cceceeesseseeeeeeeeeees 82 Right Front Seat Position neee 85 Security LIJN aeeie a a a 258 SENICE aenar A E A 444 Accessories and Modifications 444 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 446 California Proposition 65 Warning 445 Doing Your Own Work eseese 445 Engine Soon Light c eeeeeeee seen 253 Publications Ordering Information 616 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 106 Sheet Metal Damage cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 560 Shifting Into Park P eceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 157 Shifting Out of Park P cceeeeeeeeeee eran 159 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 00 51 Signals Turn and Lane Change 05 206 SNOW PIOW css ccevenrtncinnecsvacaaheeedciweasesdidoeanbacens 412 Spate MWC esses cavers cer veecteaseedscedevestsagienrs cc 552 installing vecccctsviezesstvireseedeeteardstences 537 REMOVING pareser ea PEREA REEE 533 STONING sisaan aaa a T 547 Specifications Capacities c eeeeee 572 SPCCCOMBIED siilide ianiai daanos 244 Split Bench Seat 60 40 0 20 Stabili
294. essure Monitor TPM system this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires need to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button or the trip odometer reset stem If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 507 Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 The DIC display also shows the tire pressure values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle information button See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons earlier in this section If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 253 271 DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating tempe
295. et applique A The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the liftglass release button on the RKE 126 To open the entire liftgate press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle B The vehicle must be in PARK P to open the liftgate To close the liftgate use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear wipers are in motion Attempting to open the liftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the wipers are moved off the liftglass Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftglass and liftgate will not open The liftglass and liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service Power Liftgate Your vehicle may have a power liftgate The vehicle must be in PARK P to power open or close the liftgate The liftgate must be completely closed to power open or completely open to power close The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the beginning of each power operation cycle A CAUTION You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate Make sure there is no one in the way of
296. eviously If the sunroof is in the vent position and there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Manual Close or Express Close functions described previously Section 3 Instrument Panel Overview 202 Hazard Warning Flashers ccce 204 Other Warning Devices ceceeeees 204 FIOM A AAE E EAE ASEA TT 204 Tilt Wheel seeeises rec eee dane 204 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 205 Turn and Lane Change Signals 206 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 207 FlaSh tO PaSS nra n desidow sews sievenaadene 207 Windshield Wipers aiaeeiiee 207 Rainsense Wipers ssscccsirenirn 208 Windshield Washer eenen 209 Rear Window Wiper Washer scs 210 Cruise COMtol sacccsvcctedavsteresasvevecceitvveusnenees 211 Exterior Lampe sserdorer iora 215 Headlamps on Reminder 0 216 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 216 Automatic Headlamp System ee 217 FOG LAMPS seisersdeceviwessesvwckiiaretencdiiweescsien 218 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp 005 218 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Brightness 00 219 Dome LAMPS ssa veneer sascesittehe sea okidbevsnierisd 219 Dome Lamp Override cceeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Entry LIQMUniG wicisaecth ccceteas Sevier antes fees 22
297. f this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips e Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others e Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 507 City Driving l Als A miT E Weare Lol SoU ey geil eral a Sh Palle Kel INS N Y ET hye One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 393 Here are ways to increase your safety in city Freeway Driving driving e Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip e Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy See Free
298. f two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required e Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service may be required If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reducing vehicle speed e Avoiding hard accelerations e Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 451 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly in
299. fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 26 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Bucket Seats Second Row If your vehicle has bucket seats the seatbacks can be reclined the seats can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback do the following 1 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause in
300. ference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and throughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision Ata BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
301. ff This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 10 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel the proper torque specification See prop q p wrench clockwise Capacities and Specifications on page 572 for wheel nut torque specification 542 When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire you must also reinstall the either the center cap or bolt on hub cap depending on what your vehicle has For center caps place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel The cap only goes on one way Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel For bolt on hub caps align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly which has a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare tire must be installed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 547 A CAUTION Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instr
302. flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 469 Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 473 470 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C e Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protect against rust and corrosion e Help keep the proper engine temperature e Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A CAUTION Adding only plain water to yo
303. for vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system engine hours Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system programming for vehicles with a TPM system and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming gt Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for more information vV Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer 262 To switch between English and metric measurements see Units later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem The trip odometer h
304. forward until the front rollers are lined up with the vertical curved guides 4 Push down on the rear of the system and raise the front rollers up the vertical curved guides 5 Push the system forward until all three sets of rollers are resting on the guides and release the lever to engage the locating pin into the hole To utilize the cargo management system as a table feature squeeze the release lever and pull the system towards you until the locator pin reaches the next hole The system will extend out of the vehicle The liftgate cannot be closed in this position Do not operate the vehicle with liftgate open The cargo management system can be removed from the vehicle This procedure should be completed by two people While squeezing the release lever pull the system back until the rollers clear the guides To reinstall the system align the rollers to the guides squeeze the release lever and push into position 195 On one side of the system is a retractable storage area Slide the hinge covers to the center of each side This will keep the sides of the storage system stationary and allow it to stay upright Inside the system are two removable dividers To remove unhook the loops at the ends of each divider When not in use slide the hinge covers back and the storage system will fold back down Press down on the storage cover to lock it into place To utilize the cupholders follow the procedure for removing t
305. frigerant R134a Application Transfer Case Fluid 2 0 at Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Nem TOil filter should be changed at every oil change After refill the level must be rechecked Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating range Engine Specifications Engine ViNCode Spark Plug Gap 48L V8 0 040 in 1 01 mm 5 3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Automatic 0 040 in 1 01 mm Management Iron 5 3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management 3 Automatic 0 040 in 1 01 mm Aluminum Block 5 3L V8 with Active Fuel i SOL V8 01040 n OT mm 6 0L V8 with Active Fuel 573 42 NOTES 574 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 00 576 Owner Checks and Services 586 IMMFOGUCTION sredo aaa aa 576 At Each Fuel Pill i csssstersateedecastteeeciaasaversas 586 Maintenance Requirements 008 576 At Least Once a Month cccceeeeeeeee ees 587 Your Vehicle and the Environment 576 At Least Once a Year cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 587 Using the Maintenance Schedule 577 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 590 Scheduled Maintenance ceeeeee 579 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 592 Additional Required Services 008 582 Engine Drive Belt Routing eee 593 Maintenance Footnotes 0 eeeeeeee 584 Maintenance Record
306. front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can be moved along the rod from side to side in this position also Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver s and passenger s sun visors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on Thefi Deterrent Systems To activate the theft deterrent system do the following Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of 1 Open the door theft deterrent features we know that nothing we 2 Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry put on it can make it impossible to steal RKE transmitter The security light should come on and flash The door does not need to Content Theft Deterrent be open If the delayed locking feature is active the alarm will not be activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off 3 Close all doors The security light will stop flashing and go off after approximately 30 seconds The content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If a door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a ten second pre alarm will occur The horn will chirp and the lights will flash If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre alarm the alarm will
307. frontal impact A roof mounted rollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof mounted airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts Both roof mounted rollover airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck during a rollover or ina severe frontal impact 97 In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof mounted rollover airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact or a rollover event The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving on page 372 for tips on off road driving 98 What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash In the case of a roof mounted rollover airbag the sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severe frontal or side impact The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflato
308. g distributed It is located in the rear of the vehicle on upper or lower horizontal guides There are two vertical curved guides that connect the upper and lower horizontal guides together The system has three rollers on each side The system has a release lever located in the center of the grab handle This will engage and disengage a locator pin This is used in adjusting and positioning the system The cargo management system can be positioned on the upper or lower horizontal guides 194 To adjust the system from the upper position to the lower position do the following 1 Squeeze and hold the release lever to retract the locator pin 2 Pull the system back until the front rollers reach the vertical curved guides 3 Lower the front rollers to the lower guides and pull the system back until the middle set of rollers clear the upper guides 4 Lower the system until the middle rollers are lined up with lower guides While holding in the release lever push the system forward until all three sets of rollers are on the guides 5 Release the lever and push the system until the locator pin reaches the locator hole To adjust the system from the lower position to the upper position do the following 1 Squeeze and hold the release lever to retract the locator pin 2 Pull the system back and lift until the middle rollers can be placed into the upper guides 3 Push the system
309. g inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat if the airbag is turned on Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 for more on this including important safety information 247 If after several seconds all status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service A CAUTION If the off indicator and the airbag readiness l
310. g of a DVD or CD cannot be completed unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD Eject button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 319 DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the EJECT or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack However an external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening 320 Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in PARK P See Defensive Driving on page 356 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 1 8 inch 3 5 mm cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack While a device is connected the radio automatically begins playing audio from the device over the
311. g position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 74 if the child restraint has a top tether You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passenger s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If your child restraint is forward facing move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10 When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 246 Put the child restraint on the seat Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 87
312. g steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a head rest restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a head rest restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable head rest restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the head rest restraint 81 If the position you are using has an adjustable head rest restraint and you are using a single tether raise the head rest restraint and route the tether under the head rest restraint and in between the head rest restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 82 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 74 If your vehicle has a third row there is no top tether anchor in the passenger side seating position Do not secure a child restraint in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored If your child
313. ge 13 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No automatic seat exit recall will occur ON The driver s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 13 for more information 287 Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The d
314. ge and speed rating of a tire The load index can range from 1 to 279 Speed ratings range from A to Z 511 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread 512 Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire sign
315. ge carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are driving check to make sure the luggage and cargo are still securely fastened Be sure the cargo is properly loaded e Ifsmall heavy objects are placed on the roof cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load Tie the plywood to the siderail supports e Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move a crossrail lift the release lever on both sides of the rail up to loosen it Slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Press the release lever on both sides of the rail down to tighten it Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure it is tight e If you need to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will go Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged
316. ge does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer 336 Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See Radio with CD and DVD MP3 on page 305 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system Before You Drive The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system may or may not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the
317. ght to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 428 The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight up to a maximum of 1 000 Ibs 453 kg for the 1500 series and up to a maximum of 1 500 Ibs 680 kg for the 2500 series with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After you have loaded the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not you m
318. ghted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the middle position at one time press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds If the Rear Seat Audio RSA is turned on the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name is displayed Another way to navigate the category list is to press the REV button or the FWD button 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 309 3 Turn the tune knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM station within the selected category
319. ginal stored position 551 Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 537 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 547 Notice If your vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle do not drive in four wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and or replaced You could damage your vehicle and the repair costs would not be covered by your warranty Never use four wheel drive when the different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle 552 Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle so it is all right to drive on it If your vehicle has four wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed keep the vehicle in two wheel drive After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and ins
320. gine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it i off and get everyone away from the Notice If your engine catches fire because vehicle until it cools down Wait until you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs thare iS no Sigi of Siealty or coolant would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If you keep driving when the vehicles on page 476 for information on driving to a engine is overheated the liquids in it can safe place in an emergency catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool CAUTION Continued See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency before you open the hood CAUTION Continued 474 If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day e Stop after high speed driving e Idle for lo
321. gram ccce 604 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 405 Routing Engine Drive Belt cssc 593 Running Boards Power cceeeeeeeeees 131 Running the Engine While Parked 161 S Safety Belt Passenger Reminder Light aeee 245 PFOlLONSIONGLS vs wsiccccetiwnvenedtded ened a 60 Reminder LIQht 2 2cccsicesiceetceoscrvecceedeuaceens 244 Safety Belts GAG Ol EE E eersatveskerecsese 556 Center Front Passenger Position 53 Driver POSION minero aa 43 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 43 Safety Belts cont Questions and Answers About Safety Belts asiaani nadaa 42 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides 56 Rear Seat Passengers i e 54 Right Front Passenger Position 52 Safety Belt Extender eee 60 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 52 Safety Belts Are for Everyone eese 38 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 0 51 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0000e 4 Scheduled Maintenance l a ennnen 579 Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat eee 20 Bucket Seats Rear ccceccseceeeseeeeeeeas 26 Center Seat seiersen kekrin eak 19 Head Restraints ssssntiiniereissisnucairaniis 18 Heated Seats ceccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 Heated Seats Rear a nn 19 Manual sereine 9 Memory Mirrors and Pedals 0068 13 Power LUMDAN rvssicamissiiianay aiaa 11 Power Seats ccccccce
322. h Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way 411 If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to 412 There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 372 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle here a
323. h playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder 323 When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files 324 Playing an MP3 WMA Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into the slot Single CD Player or press the load button and wait for the message to insert disc Six Disc CD Player label side up The player pulls it in and the CD
324. h the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 7 10 11 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice lf the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both removed in the wrong order electrical shorting vehicles do the following may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from would not be covered by your warranty Always the vehicle that had the bad battery connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do 2 Disconnect
325. hbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page 307 Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages perform the following steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 308 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble
326. he CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency is displayed Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the tune knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM station within the selected category 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the tune knob to display the category you want removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories 299 Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under th
327. he added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself 433 Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane 434 Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering c
328. he fog lamps to work To turn the fog lamps on press the fog lamps button A light comes on in the instrument panel cluster to let you know that the fog lamps are on Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off When the fog lamps are turned on the low beam headlamps automatically turn on The fog lamps turn off while you change to high beam headlamps When the high beam headlamps go off the fog lamps will come on again Fog lamps should only be used in foggy conditions since they could be distracting to oncoming drivers in clear weather conditions Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps 218 Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp If your vehicle has this feature this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp This button is located on the overhead console When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of this button Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located above the overhead console a dark green switched power wire and a black
329. he law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things e The amount of alcohol consumed e The drinker s body weight e The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol 357 According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka 358 It is the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender dif
330. he navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information lf your vehicle has OnStar press and hold this button for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar system If your vehicle also has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition and say OnStar to enter OnStar mode See the OnStar System on page 173 in this manual for more information 351 SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary lt Volume Press the plus or minus button to increase or to decrease the radio volume Dl Seek Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM if equipped Press this button to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Radio Reception Frequency interference and static during normal radio reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet 352 AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at nig
331. he number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages perform the following steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages 297 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the tune knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly ad
332. he radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files by that artist To listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the aloum name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that aloum To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD i
333. he system from the vehicle To access pull the handle in the center of the system up 196 Sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition needs to be turned to ON or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active When RAP is active the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 141 for more information There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof Manual Open Manual Close To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed 197 Express Open Express Close To express open the sunroof fully press and release the rear of the driver s side switch The sunroof will open autom
334. help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the drivers side of the vehicle For vehicles with E85 fuel capability a yellow cap with the words E85 or gasoline will appear 451 452 To open the fuel door push the rearward center edge inboard and release The door will pop open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door A CAUTION If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off
335. hicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the accident They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a GM dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity 613 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warra
336. hile Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 160 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 400 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P 161 A CAUTION Four wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll even if the shift lever is in PARK P So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Always set the parking brake Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
337. how a compass heading N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item e The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly In order to calibrate CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows If CAL is not displayed push in the compass temperature button for approximately nine seconds or until CAL is displayed The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings 167 To adjust for compass variance 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 Press and hold the compass temperature button for six seconds until a zone number appears in the display 168 3 Press the compass temperature button on the
338. hrough the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remot
339. ht The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo FM stereo gives the best sound but FM signals reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels can cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean
340. ht down 3 Shift back to a low gear release the parking e Never go downhill with the transmission in Brake cane Give Siralghi Gown NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling 4 If the engine will not start get out and get help Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade 384 Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider But when you drive across an incline the much more narrow track width the distance between the left and right wheels may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a A CAUTION Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead e Ahill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelinood the vehicle will tumble end over end downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel mud
341. i dante 447 GIOVE BOX sec cacsteaet casein een tele ee tebe 190 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 603 H Hazard Warning Flashers 204 Head Restraints 2 2 0 ccccecceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 18 Headlamp AMING cierritiniiie nove noeiieaeneiviennneriiede 499 Headlamps Bulb Replacement aececi 502 Daytime Running Lamps secsec 216 Flashda PASS casccrsienen cats 207 Halogen BUDS srccnciionosrcridiiarii 502 Headlamps cont High Low Beam Changer s es 207 On Reminder osescsssssensubnienisieui 216 Heated Seats cccccccceeecceceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeees 12 FHeater acs sasteeicaassinerdeansuncens Seaaetanrteninndsaatvalvies 227 Heater sioner apen aa A aN OEA 231 Highbeam On Light 0 ceeececeesseeeeeeeeees 259 Highway Hypnosis 397 Hill and Mountain Roads s es 398 Hood Checking Things Under n se 456 Release asiyaone eanan a aaa NA 457 FON einordnen nei Aa A 204 How to Use This Manual 2 0ceeeeeeee ee 4 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 43 I ignition POSItIONS sresnennsonstencssaans 140 Infants and Young Children Restraints 64 Inflation Tire Pressure cceeeeeeeeeeee ee 515 Instrument Panel OVEIVICW siens dena esanei ae kna eiee 202 Instrument Panel I P BAININ a G 219 S A E E E 243 JUMP Staring sereias udna 491 K Keyless Entry System eee 114 KOVO irern Tane E A EARO 113 L Labeling Tire Sidewall cceeeceeeseee
342. icle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision 369 So here are some tips for passing 370 Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If th
343. ifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg Se
344. ight ever come on together it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 248 Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that you have problems with the generator the generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery When this light comes on the Driver Information Center DIC will also display the SERVICE BATTERY NOT CHARGING SYSTEM message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner to reduce the drain on your battery Voltmeter Gage je O When your engine is not running but the ignition is in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system The ch
345. ignment and Tire Balance 528 Different Size oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee 526 Replacement csceeeecseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaees 528 Where to Put the Restraint eee 72 WIDOWS oorsee eieo sesantenesaeteney 132 POWER tes neces inar e Mevonetn eaueteneces 133 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades CIS ANING aiaei ienai earann eeii 558 Rainsense Wipers eee 208 634 Windshield cont WASNOM sama nenna 209 Washer PIUIG siccrceseeteassnatceeeletaentanseenesaastes 485 Wiper Blade Replacement 505 Wiper FUSOS iensor aia 564 WIDClS ercserirceie ni en E a EE AE 207 Windshield Rear Washer Wiper 210 Winter Driving srasciicierecoecaina 400 X XM Radio Messages cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 335 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 354 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment 576
346. iler Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 for more information Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If you use a weight distributing hitch make sure you don t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If you use a step bumper hitch the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper 431 If you will be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch
347. ill automatically force outside air into your vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 230 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window GJ Rear Window Defogger Press this button on the right knob to turn on the rear window defogger The system will automatically turn off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section amo e l L
348. im to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and the outside temperature F Briefly press this button to turn the display on or off 166 Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the compass temperature button Pressing the compass temperature button once briefly will toggle the display reading on and off To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius press and hold the compass temperature button for approximately three seconds until the display blinks F and C After approximately five seconds of inactivity the display will stop blinking and display the last selection made If an abnormal reading is displayed see your dealer Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation cb Press this button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light to the left of the button will turn on to indicate when the feature is on Once the mirror is turned off it will remain off until it is turned back on or until the vehicle is restarted Compass Operation Press the compass temperature button once briefly to turn the display on or off Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs e If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle e After approximately five seconds the display does not s
349. imes Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarm button is pressed again The ignition must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your GM dealer Remember to bring any additional transmitters so they can also be re coded to match the new transmitter Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle 117 Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in the RKE transmitter should last about four years The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message in the vehicle s DIC will display if the RKE transmi
350. in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your GM Goodwrench dealer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 372 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 447 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 582 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 584 for further information 577 A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 445
351. in the right front passenger s seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger s airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 103 If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger s seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger s airbag 104 Aftermarket equipment such as seat covers can affect how well the passenger sensing system A CAUTION operates You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment See If the airbag readiness light in the Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped instrument panel cluster e
352. ing is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling code device most commonly a garage door opener 6 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit 7 Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8 8 Return to the vehicle Firmly press and hold the programmed Universal Home Remote button for two seconds then release it Immediately press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds then release it Immediately press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds then release The Universal Home Remote should now activate the rolling code device To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons begin with Step 2 of Programming Universal Home Remote You do not want to repeat Step 1 a
353. ings to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 61 or Infants and Young Children on page 64 Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 43 3 44 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 51
354. ion Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 560 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this GM will repair at no charge to the
355. ion such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category might appear Continue pressing the information button to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label displays When information is not available No Info displays Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to your favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this feature See Defensive Driving on page 356 FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite T
356. ion button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected Tire Pressure If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT 265 If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer for service Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run Relearn Tire Positions If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire
357. irbag Restrain 04 99 Airbag Systems cont Passenger Sensing System ceee 101 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 106 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 98 Antenna Rear Side Window 000000 354 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SYSE uengan aranan teas iaaa a aeaii 354 Anti Lock Brake System aeee 361 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 251 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 559 Care of Safety Belts 0 ce eeeeeeeeeees 556 Chemical Paint Spotting eee 561 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 557 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 553 Fabric Carpet 0 ccccceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 554 Finish Care ietacseucsessaved eveleenvdeaasentenssvivree 557 FINISH Damage isc cccsstanate aadhecovaaenevoutdeiateny 560 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces 0 ccceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaee 556 EEE A E PE EENE E E E cas 555 Sheet Metal Damage cseeeeeeeeeeeees 560 iE E A E E A 560 Underbody Maintenance eeeee 560 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 561 Washing Your Vehicle accses 557 Appearance Care cont Weatherstrips serne rn 556 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades cccserceencecr donnin 558 PSNUAY o SE ES 227 A dio Systemi sranane Aes Seek 290 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 351 Care of Your CD and DVD Player
358. is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 63 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle 64 A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to use a child restraint A CAUTION People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A bab
359. is in it 71 Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Make sure the child is properly secured following the instructions that came with that restraint 72 Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding ina forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Your vehicle has
360. ise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down e Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down e Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down On seats with power reclining seatbacks the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats See Power Reclining Seatbacks under Reclining Seatbacks on page 15 A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 13 for more information Power Lumbar e To raise the height of the lumbar support press and hold the top of the control To lower the height of the lumbar support press and hold the bottom of the control Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on page 13 for more information Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed If the seats have power lumbar the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats e To increase lumbar support press and hold the front of the control e To decrease lumbar support pre
361. istened to in random rather than sequential order To play the tracks from the CD press the DVD CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD or insert a disc partway into the slot A RDM label displays Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information If a disc is inse
362. it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle 557 Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 558 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the out
363. ithin the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has GM trained service people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Engine Oil Life System do the following 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons the vehicle must be in PARK P to access this display See DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Bu
364. jury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 27 Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback 28 The seatback will fold forward Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position 3 Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor will tumble forward A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
365. just all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds 298 EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the tune knob until the speaker control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all soeaker and tone controls to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category T
366. king stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like anti lock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of e Be sure you have sufficient California to cause cancer and birth defects or knowledge experience the proper other reproductive harm Engine exhaust f TAN replacement parts and tools many parts and systems including some inside before you attempt any vehicle the vehicle many fluids and some component maintenance task wear by products contain and or emit these Be sure to se the proper nuts bolts chemicals and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily Doing Your Own Service Work confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt A CAUTION a If you want to do some of your own service work You can be injured and your vehicle cou
367. l or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited 372 While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Anti Lock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving This off road guide is for vehicles that have four wheel drive Also see Braking on page 360 If your vehicle does not have four wheel drive you should not drive off road unless you are on a level solid surface The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you have left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes are
368. l Buttons See Cruise Control on page 211 OZ E v Tilt Wheel Lever See Tilt Wheel on page 204 Horn See Horn on page 204 Audio Steering Wheel Controls See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 351 Climate Controls See Climate Control System on page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate Controls If Equipped See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 231 Accessory Power Outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 225 Cigarette Lighter If Equipped See Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter on page 227 StabiliTrak Button If Equipped See StabiliTrak System on page 363 Pedal Adjust Button If Equipped See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 143 Rear Park Assist Disable Button If Equipped See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 222 Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button If Equipped See Windshield Washer on page 209 Power Running Boards Disable Button If Equipped See Power Running Boards on page 131 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 190 203 Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flashers warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column The hazard warning flashers work no matter what ignition position the key is in and even if the key is not in the ignition Press the button to make the front and
369. l built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill e ls there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e ls there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough St
370. l speed To stop fast forwarding press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews amp Eject Press this button to eject a CD or DVD If a CD or DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed because of an unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the CD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot gt Il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon displays on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the system is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after
371. l until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows If you want to listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main
372. lass and liftgate will not open The liftglass and liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death CAUTION Continued 130 CAUTION Continued If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off That will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System on page 227 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 231 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way If your vehicle has a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function See Engine Exhaust on page 160 Power Running Boards The switch used to disable the power Your vehicle may have power running boards running boards is The power running boards automatically extend located on the center from beneath the vehicle on th
373. lay a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing the disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc If you have a radio with a single CD MP3 or a six disc CD MP3 player it is capable of playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages CHECK DISC If this message displays and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e lt is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The airis very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There could have been a problem while burning the CD e The label could be caught in the CD player 303 If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The r
374. laying a CD In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3s When a CD is inserted the text label DVD or CD symbol appears on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number appears on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such
375. ld you should use the proper service manual It be damaged if you try to do service work tells you much more about how to service your on a vehicle without knowing enough vehicle than this manual can To order the proper about it service manual see Service Publications CAUTION Continued Ordering Information on page 616 CAUTION Continued 445 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 106 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 594 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle 446 Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance GM recommends the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 562 If your vehicle has the 5 3L
376. lect 589 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer Usage _ Fluid Lubricant Engine Oil Engine Coolant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 459 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 470 Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid 590 Windshield Washer Power Steering System Automatic Transmission Key Lock Cylinders Chassis Lubrication Front Axle 1500 Series Vehicles with Four Wheel Drive Fluid Lubricant GM Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No U S 89021184 in Canada 89021186 DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB SAE 80W 90 Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 1052271 in Canada 10950849 Usage _ Fluid Lubricant Front Axle 2500 Series Vehicles with Fo
377. less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work e Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play alarge number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off e Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc might cause the disc not to function in the player Playlists can be changed by using the previous and next folder buttons the tuner knob or the seek buttons An MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW that was recorded can also be played using no file folders If a CD R or CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and a combined total of 512 folders and files the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is
378. lights will come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer for service 361 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels 362 ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With ABS you can
379. ll will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight 425 Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh based upon your vehicle model and options C 1500 2WD Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 4800 V8 3 23 4 200 Ibs 1 905 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 536 kg 3 73 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 5300 V8 3 42 6 200 Ibs 2 812 kg 12 000 Ibs 5 443 kg 3 73 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 13 000 Ibs 5 897 kg 5300 V8 Extended 3 73 7 100 I
380. lowing e Instrument Panel Lights Taillamps e License Plate Lamps ZD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will continue to stay on Turn the control to the off position to turn the headlamps off or the battery will be drained 215 A warning chime will sound if you open the driver s door when the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps Headlamps on Reminder A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is off and a door is open To disable the chime turn the light off Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada 216 The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e Th
381. lso be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall You will have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off 3 Using the DIC press the vehicle information button until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays If your vehicle does not have the DIC buttons press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays 4 If your vehicle has the DIC buttons press the set reset button The horn will sound twice to indicate the TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message will display If your vehicle does not have the DIC buttons press and hold the trip odometer reset stem until the horn chirps twice and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message is displayed 519 5 Start with the driver s side front tire 6 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor
382. ly My GM Canada is a password protected section of gmcanada com where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers My Driveway Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle My Preferences Manage your profile subscribe to E News and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up to My GM Canada visit the My GM Canada section within www gmcanada com 601 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user in the U S can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing 1 800 833 CHEV 2438 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Chevrolet the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P
383. ly 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 602 189 Storage Areas Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling up on the bottom of the handle Cupholder s Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front and rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest The front cupholders can be adjusted by moving the insert forward or rearward You may also have cupholders in the second and third row seat armrest areas 190 To access the cupholders in the rear floor console pull downward on the lid Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may have a console compartment with cupholders between the bucket seats To open it press the button and lift the console lid open The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passenger to use Luggage Carrier The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be used to load things on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof It may also have crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports Notice Loading cargo on the lugga
384. me Setting eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 291 292 293 Tire Pressure Ligii cornesssnssa 253 MES aeaa EA ROE 507 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning irran E 559 Buying New Tires esrseserrersirrena 524 GRAINS ersin aara Ere ESA 530 Changing a Flat Tire 0 532 GleaniNg spanerien aai 560 Different SiZ srani iaronn 526 If a Tire Goes Flat sicsiiustianiennaasats 531 Inflation Tire Pressure ccce 515 Inspection and Rotation 0 eeeeee 521 Installing the Spare Tire 0 ceeeeeeee 537 Pressure Monitor System a 516 Removing the Flat Tire eeeeeeeeeeeeee 537 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 533 Secondary Latch System 0 ee 543 Tires cont Spare NG fees diecdivedsdhdevsdaie ereea nected avedeaveds 552 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 547 Tire Sidewall Labeling ceeeeeeeee 508 Tire Terminology and Definitions 512 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 00 527 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 528 Wheel Replacement ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 528 When It Is Time for New Tires 5 523 TOW Havl Mode secnusasnn 149 Tow Haul Mode Light oseceniccrnerenscreses 259 Towing Recreational Vehicle cceseeeeees 418 Towing a Trailer 2 0 0 eceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 422 Your Vehicle encina 417 Traction StabiliTrak System n se 363 Trailer Recommendations osensccsissranraene 440 Tra
385. mended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage transmission shift linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints on 2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10 F 12 or higher or they could be damaged Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance free a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc 584 b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine GM parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Re
386. might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 402 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe e Turn on your hazard flashers e Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow e Puton extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the bas
387. minutes e OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only Available Services included with Directions amp Connections Plan e All Safe and Sound Plan Services e Driving Directions Advisor delivered or OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped e RideAssist e Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Hands Free Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owners Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses your minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owners Guide for more information Only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Your vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnS
388. monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called Event Data Recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throttle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag performance and the severity of a collision If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak steering performance including yaw rate steering wheel angle and lateral acceleration is also recorded This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants 609 To read this information special equipment is needed and
389. mote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle do the following 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE will display 269 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear To select a language do the following 1 Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays 2 While in the ODOMETER display press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays 270 3 Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages The available languages are ENGLISH default FRANCAIS French ESPANOL Spanish and NO CHANGE 4 Once the desired language is displayed release the trip odome
390. move See Shifting Into Park P on page 157 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 422 162 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this feature When on the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror face that shows the compass reading and the outside temperature Control buttons for the OnStar system are at the bottom of the mirror See OnStar System on page 173 for more information about the services OnStar provides 4 On Off This is the on off button Temperature and Compass Display Press the on off button located to the far left briefly to turn the compass temperature display on or off If the display reads CAL the compass needs to be calibrated For more information see Compass Calibration following To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the following 1 Press and hold the on off button for approximately four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears 2 Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new unit will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time see your
391. n Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it PARK TILT MIRRORS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R See Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors on page 172 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R DRIVER MIRROR The driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it EASY EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals on pa
392. n Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Press the cancel button on the steering wheel e Press the On Off button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition the cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems e Headlamps e Taillamps e Parking Lamps e License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions Off Turn the control to this position to turn off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position will only work for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK P position AUTO Automatic Turn the control to this position to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps 00 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the fol
393. n activated On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode 229 43 Defog The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers This mode directs air to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents When you select this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear W Defrost The defrost mode is used to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly This mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor vents In this mode the system w
394. n also help you with this The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification Tire label as shown previously See your dealer for additional advice and information about using a snow plow on your vehicle Also see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency roof lamp provision package RPO TRW Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is provided above the overhead console See Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp on page 218 for switch location Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 604 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following 417 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing
395. n and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you cannot stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause accidents They may not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply the brake pedal lightly until the brakes work normally Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to
396. n button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset stem See Language under DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons earlier in this section for more information AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 123 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P 281 AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it AUTO DO
397. n cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 You may notice during cooler weather conditions that the tire pressure monitor light located on the instrument panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive the vehicle This could be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as po
398. n press and hold the remote start button to start the vehicle To start the vehicle using the remote start feature do the following 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash If you cannot see the vehicle s lights press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds The vehicle s doors will lock Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the ignition When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running 3 If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle 120 If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start do any of the following e Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequen
399. nd roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P CAUTION Continued 532 be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following Removing the Spare Tire and Tools example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is stored under the storage tray which is located on the driver s side trim panel over the rear wheelhouse FS a The following information will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire Regular Wheelbase shown Extended Wheelbase similar 1 Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up on the finger depression under the jack symbol 533 2 Remove the wing nut B used to retain the tool bag by turning it counterclockwise 3 534 Turn the knob A on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket Remove the whe
400. nder Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information If a MP3 WMA is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control XM Radio Messages Radio Display Message Action Required XL Explicit Language XL on the radio display These channels or any others can be blocked at a Channels after the channel name customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 indicates content with explicit language XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is ina location that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and after four second delay text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service Tune to another channel Channel Unavail Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned available Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info Artist Name Feature not No ar
401. ndicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each 8 Press and release the same button again switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s The garage door should move confirming Universal Home Remote You will have two that programming is successful and complete and one half minutes to complete Step 4 Now press one button on the ee Sane To program another Fixed Code device such as an Remote for each switch setting as follows additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 i e Bel piss Ue tai ounan ithe choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you j for th e Ifyou wrote Right press the right button in used for the garage coor apaner the vehicle e If you wrote Middle press the middle button in the vehicle 188 Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device do the following 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximate
402. next to the clock display The parental control feature remains on until this button is pressed and held for more than two seconds again or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle J Tune Turn this knob to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also see Setting the Time in the index for setting the clock and date 316 K SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SEEK Next Track Chapier Press this button to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews lt lt REV Reverse Press this button to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the CD or DVD The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the norma
403. nformation Control DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 2D 2D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation Windshield Wipers Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well making it harder to see and drive safely If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 505 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor
404. ng the StabiliTrak on off button Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o clock position to the three o clock position If this clears the message s your vehicle does not need servicing If this does not clear the message s then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC your vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 260 364 The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated QD ee You may also feel or hear the system working this is normal BS The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both systems traction control and StabiliTrak were previously on To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold the button for five seconds Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on
405. ng periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 422 If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If you have an air conditioner and it is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle immediately 475 If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while you are parked If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan idle the engine for five minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help
406. ng the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays MP3 WMA files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files By default the radio shows the MP3 WMA label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc 321 MP3 WMA Format If you burn your own MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer 322 Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and a combined total of 512 folders and files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or
407. nk Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan s W gt 477 A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system 478 Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water an
408. nly or the menu as previously described If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays If playing a CD R or CD RW the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R or CD RW quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R or CD RW has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is r
409. nne 190 Four Wheel Drive O 497 SUMOOL arrainen n stave ies 197 Bont ANI oak ch oe ec ce ae 498 Headlamp Aiming easca Bulb Replacement _ Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 0ce TIES csctadstvvactintassenradeecectnadees Appearance Care Vehicle Identification Electrical System oe Capacities and Specifications Maintenance Schedule 575 Maintenance Schedule eee 576 Customer Assistance Information _ 597 Customer Assistance and Information _ 598 Reporting Safety Defects ow 615 Index i sividvtaaitiannieoerialavntrlasaeeatiaeemianauen 619 CHEVROLET GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CHEVROLET the CHEVROLET Emblem and the names TAHOE SUBURBAN and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual Litho in U S A Part No 15854794 C Third Printing This manual describes features that may be available in this model but your vehicle may not have all of them For example more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a front passenger or rear seats Keep this manual in the v
410. not marked Curves are not banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill In short you have gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that is why it is very important that you read this guide You will find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle you can remove the front fascia lower air dam The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by two bolts and 10 snap features The bolts and snap features are accessible from underneath the front fascia The following steps must be performed on the bolts and snap features to remove the air dam 1 Remove the two outboard air dam bolts 2 With a flat blade screwdriver push down on the snap features and disengage the snaps 3 After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged push forward on the air dam until it is free When you are back on roads though be sure to replace the air dam Notice Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off road driving To reinstall the lower air dam do the following 1 Line up the snap features and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps 2
411. now this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair 607 Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer retailer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation and participating dealers retailers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters for the dealer s retailer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used as shuttle service the reimbursement is limited to the associated shuttle allowance and must be supported by original receipts 608 In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your d
412. nsert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft access hole Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 549 To store the tools do the following 7 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the A Wheel Blocks E Jack tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten B Tool Bag with F Wing Nut the cable Jack Tools Retaining Wheel 8 Reinstall the spare tire lock C Retaining Blocks 9 Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover Bracket G Wing Nut D Wing Nut on Jack Retaining Tool Bag 1 Return the tools wheel wrench jack handle and jack handle extensions to the tool bag B 550 Assemble wheel blocks A and jack E together with the wing nut F Position the jack E and wheel blocks A in the driver s side trim panel over the wheelhouse Turn the wing nut G clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket Use the retaining bracket C to fasten the tool bag B on the stud and turn the wing nut D clockwise to secure 6 Return the storage tray to its ori
413. nsmission Fluid Automatic ccc cececc seca eeeeeeeeeeeees 466 Transmission Operation Automatic 145 Trip Odometer 2 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 244 Turn and Lane Change Signals 5 206 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 006 205 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 222 Understanding Radio Reception 5 352 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0c00 527 Universal Home Remote System 178 OD ELALOM scoireann 178 182 System Identification ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Vehicle GOI raea A 360 Damage Warnings cccsseeeeeneeeeeeeaaaeeees 5 Loading corcccsrnercenrien nnne 407 DVIMDOIS errau oa ian eh sede e Eiei 5 Vehicle Customization DIC oseese 280 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders sisceiicvenctesanvandesivadecthee tite caacewtess 609 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeee ees 562 Service Parts Identification Label 563 Ventilation Adjustment cceeeeeeeeeee a 238 ISOS hessa aana aaa a ENEA 134 Voltmeter Gage cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 249 633 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 242 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 005 270 Hazard Warning Flashers a 204 Other Warning Devices 204 Safety and Symbol Sessea liisis 4 Vehicle Damage cesececseriocnsndcrocisees 5 Wheels Al
414. nt Do not use equipment exceeding the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter The front ashtray is located near the center of the instrument panel or on the front console if equipped Pull on the ashtray door to open it Notice lf you put papers pins or other flammable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Climate Controls Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating cooling defrost defog and ventilation of your vehicle Manual Operation Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle 227
415. nty 614 Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle
416. o Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this manual you will find these notices Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics e Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 e Features and Controls in Section 2 e Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 e Climate Controls in Section 3 e Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in Section 3 e Audio System s in Section 3 e Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle LATCH BOTH LAP AND CAUTION SHOULDER BELTS TO MASTEN CY ENGINE TIRE A COOLANT PRESSURE i TEMP UN PROTECT OCCUPANT LIGHTING DO NO
417. ode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors from entering your vehicle Recirculation may also help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes the indicator will flash three times and turn off The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the button again or turning off the engine AUX Auxiliary Pressing this button will turn the rear heating and air conditioning on See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 239 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 240 for more information Temperature Control Rotate the thumbwheels up or down to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for the dual zone system 3 Air Conditioning Press this button on the left Knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off When A C is pressed an indicator light will come on to let you know that the air conditioning has bee
418. of the turn signal multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed For more washer cycles press and hold the button The rear window wiper washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on the wiper will return to the parked position and stop Cruise Control A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes cruise control is turned off 211 If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak system and begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control the cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 363 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on o el The cruise control buttons
419. oltage to assist enable disable the tow haul mode in recharging a battery installed in a trailer f A light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that tow haul mode has been selected 424 Your vehicle is equipped with a button at the end of the shift lever which when pressed enables tow haul Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoride which further improves your vehicle s ride while towing See Autoride on page 422 for more information When the button is pressed a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that Tow Haul has been selected Tow Haul may be turned off by pressing the button again at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow Haul every time it is started Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in this section Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired Operating the vehicle in tow haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at a
420. om your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing Driving with a Trailer A CAUTION If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust on page 160 To maximize your safety when towing a trailer e Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use the climate control setting for maximum air because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle See Climate Control System on page 227 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with t
421. omplaint to the final decision should be completed in about 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge 600 For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 Alternatively you may call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or you may write to The Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center United States only The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to e Get e mail service reminders e Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual e Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule e Find GM dealers retailers for service nationwide e Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members Refer to www MyGMLink com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle My GM Canada Canada on
422. on page 457 for more information the ground upward A to the recorded A 4 At the wall or other flat surface measure from distance from Step 3 and mark it Ya 2 T TOD HFA ei 5 Draw or tape a horizontal line B on the wall i or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4 2 Locate the aim dot on the lens of the Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve low beam headlamp beam cut off when aiming Covering a 3 Measure the distance from the ground to the headlamp may cause excessive heat build up aim dot on the low beam headlamp Record which may cause damage to the headlamp the distance 6 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface 500 7 Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx socket 8 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line The lamp on the left A shows the correct headlamp aim The lamp on the right B shows the incorrect headlamp aim
423. on followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your vehicle s engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump the brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If the engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has the Anti Lock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away ABS will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 251 Along with ABS your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning
424. on once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it 284 DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter a second time See Delayed Locking on page 123 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll t
425. on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label This label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle 525 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected 526 A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 524 and Accessories and Modifications on
426. onal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp EJECT Press the CD eject button to eject CD R s or CD RW s To eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs J Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 WMA files on the CD lt Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder 325 lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse playback
427. onditioning 3 Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off When air conditioning is selected an indicator light will come on to let you know that the air conditioning has been activated Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning indicator flash three times and then turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is not available If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light will turn off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal 235 Sensors The solar sensor located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel monitors the solar radiation Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly 236 The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner above the driver side seat and in the headliner above the second row seats m
428. one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink 359 Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving
429. ones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs radio any auxiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 2 switch and a volume control If your vehicle has a third row video screen display it has two additional headphones 338 Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light does not come on the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal The headphones automatically turns off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ea
430. ongs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to eight subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a m3u wpl or pls extension as other file extensions may not work e Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play alarge number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off e Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not to function in the player Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directo
431. onto the tow dolly 2 Shift the transmission to PARK P Turn the engine off but leave the ignition on Firmly set the parking brake Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow dolly oa A OQ A CAUTION Shifting a four wheel drive vehicle s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or others could be injured Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL 6 Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL See Four Wheel Drive on page 150 for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle 7 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on two wheel drive and four wheel drive light duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride suspension if equipped This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to ten
432. ontrol systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin 371 A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Remember StabiliTrak helps avoid only the acceleration skid See StabiliTrak System on page 363 If the StabiliTrak System is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice grave
433. or Locations Second Row 60 40 76 Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Second Row Bucket B Third Row Two Passenger Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors i Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors t Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors a at Third Row Three Passenger For models with a three passenger third row seat see the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the third row if your vehicle has one Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor For models with 60 40 second row seating the rear right side passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion For models with second row bucket seats both rear seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion Second Row Seat Bucket For models with bucket second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the chil
434. or P dirt from the wheel AN CAUTION bolts mounting j Ae NEA I surfaces and spare Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts fae k wheel to which it is fastened can make the j wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use Z CAUTION a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 7 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare tire 541 8 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage wheel is held against the hub To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 572 for the wheel nut torque specification 9 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely A CAUTION Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come o
435. or less until the display reads a direction 164 Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is outside of zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance the compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the following 3 Keep pressing the on off button until the 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map desired zone number appears in the display Release the button After approximately four seconds of inactivity the new zone number will be locked in and the compass temperature display will return Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing 2 Press and hold the on off button until a Z and a zone number appears in the display The compass is now in zone mode 165 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this mirror When on an automatic dimming mirror will d
436. or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 156 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service 587 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to RUN Control System Check but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the Z CAUTION shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service When you are doing this inspection the Ignition Transmission Lock Check vehicle could move suddenly If the While parked and with the parking brake set try vehicle moves you or others could be to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever injured position e The ignition should turn to LOCK only when 1 Before you start be sure you have enough the shift lever is in PARK P room around the vehicle It should be parked e The ignition key should come out only in LOCK on a level surface Cand GNI Goga h dealer if R 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking cai eee Sen earners Brake on page 156 Be re
437. or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 557 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253 453 If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately 454 Notice lf you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253 Filling a Portable Fuel Container A CAUTION Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before Never fill a portable fuel container while it operating the nozia Comtact Should is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite
438. or sensor the system must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information 266 Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle do the following 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS v TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons the information below explains the operation of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster Pressing the trip o
439. orders on the top and by pressing the display 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment ae eee or ae onheremote Make Sure that they are installed correctly In auxiliary mode the Check the auxiliary input using the diagram on the inside of the battery picture moves or scrolls connections at both compartment devices 3 Close the battery door securely The remote control does Check to make sure there l not work is no obstruction between If the remote control is to be stored for a long the remote control and the period of time remove the batteries and keep them transmitter window in a cool dry place Check the batteries to q make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly After stopping the player If the stop button was push Play but sometimes pressed one time the DVD the DVD starts where left player resumes playing off and sometimes atthe where the DVD was beginning stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD 346 Recommended Action The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary picture or sound source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correc
440. ories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on that vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery The remote positive terminal if equipped is located under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover 492 D AS Ta Nor W SNA xV y LS p tae EE EA ANN ge Uy The remote negative terminal is a stud located on the right front of the engine where the negative battery cable attaches See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on the location of the remote positive and remote negative terminals A CAUTION An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery h
441. ositioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 3 Position the jack under the vehicle as shown 538 Front Position Front Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension Attach the jack handle to the jack A Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground Rear Position 1500 Models 539 Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 4 Remove all of the wheel nuts Rear Position All Other Models 5 Take off the flat tire Rear Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle B and both jack handle extensions C Attach the wheel wrench D to the jack handle extensions C Attach the jack handle B to the jack A Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle Turn the wheel wrench D clockwise to raise the vehicle 540 6 Remove any rust
442. ot connected No Input Device Found displays Radio with CD and DVD MP3 Cw pet I 1l I l l 1l lt i J 200 BAND KI I lt 1 tt ff pvorco SEEK SEEK REV FWD AUX If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system it has a CD DVD radio See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS Digital Surround are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Dolby is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station 305 XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada XM offers a large variety of coas
443. ot properly attached or twisted will not 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor k provide the protection needed in a crash The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted move forward in a sudden stop or crash 3 Make sure that the safety belt in the center That could cause injury to the person seating position is not caught between the sitting there Always push and pull on the two seats and is not twisted seatback to be sure it is locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked A CAUTION 25 Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
444. ote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature the RKE transmitter will have an extended range that allows locking or unlocking of the vehicle from approximately 197 feet 60 m away See your dealer if you would like to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle 121 Doors and Locks CAUTION Continued Door Locks Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the There are several ways to lock and unlock your doors whenever you drive vehicle CAUTION Continued From the outside use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the key in the driver s door From the
445. ould cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD 3 or if necessary a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often e g under heavy loads and or hilly conditions You may also want to activate the tow haul mode if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode ea
446. ould need no further adjustment However if the vehicle is damaged in an accident the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be adjusted It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer retailer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted It is possible however to re aim the headlamps as described in the following procedure The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows e The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall e The vehicle must have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall e The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall e The vehicle should not have any snow ice or mud on it e The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed e The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs 75 kg sitting on the driver s seat e Tires should be properly inflated e The spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle s low beam headlamps The high beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam headlamps are aimed properly 499 To adjust the vertical aim do the following 1 Open the hood See Hood Release
447. our favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer retailer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment can interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems can interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 147 for more information Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD the radio has a clock button for setting the time and date To set the time and date follow the instructions 1 Press the clock button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is
448. outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Release both buttons The Universal Home Remote is now in the training learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section Individual buttons cannot be erased but they can be reprogrammed See Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button following this section 181 Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button Do not release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds While still holding the Universal Home Remote button proceed with Step 2 under Programming Universal Home Remote shown earlier in this section For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 602 182 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round Light Emitting Diode LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below This system provides a
449. ove Determine which Universal Home Remote your the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the vehicle has and then read the pages following for instructions under Universal Home Remote System instructions on programming your specific system Operation With Three Round LED For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 602 If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode LED indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation With One Triangular LED 177 Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifi
450. ove box literature For more information visit onstar com or onstar ca contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar com OnStar Services the Safe amp Sound For new vehicles with OnStar Plan or the Directions amp Connections Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year or upgrade to the Directions amp Connections Plan 174 For more information press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Some OnStar services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until you register with OnStar Available Services with Safe amp Sound Plan e Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment e Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped e Link to Emergency Services e Roadside Assistance e Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance e AccidentAssist e Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert e OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics e OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 complimentary
451. owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Usae Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Wax Treated polishing cloth Tar and Road Oil Removes tar road oil Remover and asphalt Chrome Cleaner and Use on chrome or Polish stainless steel White Sidewall Tire Removes soil and black Cleaner marks from whitewalls Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl Removes dirt grime Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime ovome and Wire Wheel from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off Removes swirl marks fine Swirl Remover Polish scratches and other light surface contamination Removes light scratches Finish Enhancer 561 Description Usae Vehicle Identification i Cleans shines and Foaming Tire Shine Low A aes Gloss eee Vehicle Identification Number VIN Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and Wash Wax Concentrate ae coe me SAMPLE4UX1M07267 phosphate free O o Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery Odorless spray odor _ This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics appears ona plate in the front corner of the vinyl eater ane carpet instrument panel on the driver
452. per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero Press the reset button located on the instrument panel cluster next to the trip odometer display to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it To display the odometer reading with the ignition off press the reset button 244 Tachometer Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will sound for several seconds to remind people to buckle their safety belts The driver safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds Then it will flash for several more You should buckle your seat belt This chime and light will be repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion LZ If the driver s belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on See Passenger Sensing System on page 101 for more information Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will sound for several
453. peration on page 115 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 for more information 283 Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset butt
454. perature It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working During a majority of the operation the gage will read 210 F 100 C or less If you are pulling a load or going up hills it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250 F 122 C mark If the gage reaches the 260 F 125 C mark it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity See Engine Overheating on page 473 Tire Pressure Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition to RUN This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 507 for more information This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle has a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for th
455. place wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When
456. played The trip odometer has a feature called the retro active reset This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles kilometers driven since the ignition was last turned on This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip To use the retro active reset feature press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds The trip odometer will display the number of miles mi or kilometers km driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving Once the vehicle begins moving the trip odometer will accumulate mileage 268 For example if the vehicle was driven 5 miles 8 km before it is started again and then the retro active reset feature is activated the display will show 5 miles 8 km As the vehicle begins moving the display will then increase to 5 1 miles 8 2 km 5 2 miles 8 4 km etc If the retro active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started but before it begins moving the display will show the number of miles mi or kilometers km that were driven during the last ignition cycle Oil Life To access this display the vehicle must be in PARK P Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will al
457. pped by turning the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or LOCK position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down 142 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Adjustable Throttle
458. pressed again the time or the date if selected increases by one e Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD forward button 291 3 To decrease the time or date press the left SEEK arrow or the REV reverse button You can also turn the tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month day year to day month year To change the time or date default settings follow these instructions 1 Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the clock button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 292 Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a CD and DVD Player If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD and DVD player the radio has a clock button for setting the time and date To set the time and date follow these instructions 1 Press the clock button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want
459. r See Engine Oil on page 459 Reset oil life system poe fe See Engine Oil Life System on page 462 An Emission Control Service Lubricate chassis components See oomo f gt T Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote P Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator if equipped If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 464 See footnote I Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 587 Inspect brake system See footnote a ooo e e o e 580 Scheduled Maintenance cont d Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b a i inspect engine cooling system See tooro M T inspect wiper blades See oome M T Inspect restraint system components Ses fomo 3 T Lubricate body components See oomo p D J Check transmission fuid level and add fuid as needed J 581 Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 80 000 120
460. r The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set through your dealer for more information 339 Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones do the following 1 Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 340 Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks located on the rear of the floor console allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to th
461. r which inflates the airbag The inflator airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger For vehicles with roof mounted rollover airbags the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows If your vehicle has a third row seat with roof mounted rollover airbags the airbag modules are located inside the rear most pillar trim and above in the ceiling above the fixed rear glass How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the airbag Roof mounted rollover airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including many frontal or near frontal collisions and rear impacts Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near
462. r new parts for your safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 109 60 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash According to accident statis
463. r surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles 553 You r dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your dealer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques 554 Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers U
464. r vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Outside Heated Mirrors The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which help clear them of condensation snow and ice When the rear window defogger button is pressed the heated mirrors are also turned on See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 231 or Climate Control System on page 227 for more information OnStar System o e OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors If you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside Service for you 173 OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions You may cancel your OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar as provided below A complete OnStar Owners Guide and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle s OnStar Subscriber gl
465. raint in your vehicle even airbag is off Irbag when no child is in it If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat 73 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle 74 Not all vehicle seating
466. rak Indicator Light cccc0e 252 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 252 Tire Pressure Light ccecce 253 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 253 Oil Pressure Gage aseeseen 256 200 Instrument Panel Oil Pressure Light ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 SOCUNILY LIGHT ssctsehecessnsdeetarssecches Sewdeeer tabs 258 FOg Lamp Light scesccacsececicaieewectiaseteecetinveees 258 Cruise Control Light ceeeeeeeees 258 Highbeam On Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 Tow Haul Mode Light occ 259 Fuel GAG seora rosuo t eeann ata veersentaeeess 259 Low Fuel Warning Light e 260 Driver Information Center DIC 260 DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons 0 0 00 eee 267 DIC Warnings and Messages 006 270 DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 280 Section 3 Audio System S c ccceceeseeeeeeeaeeeeees Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player oreinaren Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a CD and DVD Player cee Setting the Time MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player eeeeeeeeeeees Radio with CD MP3 e eeeeeeeeeeeeeees Radio with CD and DVD MP3 4 Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Using an MP3
467. rake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the wires are not connected They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center If you are charging a remote non vehicle battery press the tow haul mode button located at the end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery If the trailer is too light for tow haul mode you can turn on the headlamps as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery 439 Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Dark Blue Brake Signal to Trailer Connector e Red Black Battery e Light Blue White Brake Switch e White Ground It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored 440 Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating CWR for your vehicle CWR is the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry It doesn t include the weight of the people inside But you can
468. raking especially since you are on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose conirol and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider e ls the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There is more discussion of these subjects later e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly
469. rature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 252 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine 272 ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL If your vehicle has an oil level sensor this message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message clears This message clears itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle See Engine Oil on page 459 for additional information ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 473 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 252 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
470. re some things you will need to know Notice If your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package adding a plow can damage your vehicle and the repairs would not be covered by warranty Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow do not add one to your vehicle If your vehicle has the snow plow prep package called RPO VYU then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are exceeded gt O Q How do I know if my vehicle can handle a snow plow Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep package called RPO VYU If your vehicle has this option you can add a plow to it provided certain weights such as the weights on the vehicle s axles and the Gross Vehicle Weight GVW are not exceeded How heavy can a snow plow safely be The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things such as The options your vehicle came with and the weight of those options The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry The weight of items you have added to your vehicle The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry Say for example you have a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 Ib 135 kg This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger But even this m
471. rest position 4 Replace the wiper blade 5 Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position 2 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 3 Rotate the wiper blade assembly and pull it off of the wiper arm Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm 506 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your GM Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet included with your vehicle A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your vehicle s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Tire pressure should be checked when your vehicle s tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impac
472. rieds 484 Windshield Washer assesseer 485 624 Fog Lamp Fog anaa 218 Fog Lamp Light si t tecwersisevnncretsscmersseven eahesey 258 Four Wheel Drive ccccceeceeeeeee eens 150 497 Front AXIE snrcessiceutnnssseneranssaivinssdanbetassesennsaklac 498 FUSI aoran aat ea tacit ieee 446 PCOILIVGS onsereen eriei eae Ra eea 448 California Fuel ccccceseeceeesseeeeeeaaeeeees 447 E85 85 Ethanol cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 449 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 455 Filing Your TANK tsegercctsdeders te dioucdeteeessedaee 451 Fuels in Foreign Countries eee 450 Gage sieeve eit eee ee 259 Gasoline Octane cccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 447 Gasoline Specifications ccceeeeeeees 447 Low Warning Light oee 260 Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 566 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 008 564 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0 565 Underhood Fuse Block 0 ceeeeees 567 Windshield Wiper 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 564 G Gage Engine Coolant Temperature 05 252 FUG P E vase dee suad E E 259 Oll Pressure iiietacceta ae ene deals 256 Speedometer ccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteeteeeees 244 TACHOMOUCR anren phabiheeetenueeteeteniteeses 244 Voltmeter Gage ccceeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeees 249 Garage Door Openet c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 178 Gasoline OCTAING E EEEE 447 Specifications si
473. rivers seat and on some vehicles the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed On some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature the pedals will also automatically move See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons on page 267 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it 288 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be mad
474. riving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside During that delay your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure your instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 219 Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the vehicle You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when needed 217 Fog Lamps 40 Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps the button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column and below the dome lamp override button The ignition must be in RUN and the parking lamps must be on for t
475. rk when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK the windows and sunroof will continue to work until a door is opened The radio will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver s door is opened Starting the Engine To place the transmission in the proper gear Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine will not start in any other position this is a safety feature To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts Your vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts 141 If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be sto
476. rlier in this section for more information When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant at higher altitudes will boil at a lower temperature than at or near sea level If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating on page 473 435 Parking on Hills A CAUTION You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brake but don t shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK P 436 5 If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL 6 Release the regular brakes A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehi
477. rmal The transmission torque converter clutch operation is restricted during cold operation When the startup transmission temperature is approximately 64 F 18 C your torque converter clutch will temporarily not operate Once the transmission temperature rises above 68 F 20 C normal operation will resume Tow Haul Mode Your vehicle has a Tow Haul mode The selector button is located on the end of the column shift lever You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a battery installed in a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 422 for more information When Tow Haul mode is selected the Tow Haul indicator light will come on The Tow Haul mode works with the Autoride feature if the vehicle has this to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle See Autoride on page 422 149 Four Wheel Drive If your vehicle has four wheel drive you can send your engine s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction Read the part that follows before using four wheel drive Notice Driving on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle s powertrain Do not drive on clean dry pavement in Four Wheel Drive High or Four Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns you may experience a
478. ront axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating United States Canada GAWR and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers Basically it is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR 414 In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory such as a snow plow is adding to the front axle use the following formula W x A W B W B Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle Where W Weight of added accessory A Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W B Vehicle Wheelbase For example adding a 700 Ib 318 kg snow plow actually adds more than 700 Ibs 318 kg to the front axle Using the formula if the snow plow is 4 ft 122 cm in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft 305 cm then W 700 Ib 318 kg A 4 ft 122 cm W B 10 ft 305 cm W x A W B W B 700 x 4 10 10 980 Ibs 445 kg So if your vehicle s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 Ibs 445 kg you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR 415 Q A 416 What if want to add heavier equipment to my vehicle You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers less cargo or by positioning cargo towards the rear This ha
479. rs About Safety Belts Q A Will be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has airbags why should have to wear safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special th
480. rs of Canada Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership retailer name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage kilometers When contacting Chevrolet please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s retailer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer retailer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2 you should file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing
481. rted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control 313 Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Auxiliary Jack or Rear Auxiliary Jack Press the power button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged into the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information 314 Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc A radio with CD and DVD has the capability of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages If these messages displays and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons Optical Error The disc was inserted upside down Disk Re
482. ructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A CAUTION Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 67 Child Restraint Systems A CAUTION The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in appropriate child restraints in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant
483. ry Seat Mirrors and Pedals 13 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0005 270 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass and Temperature Display 166 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar Compass and Temperature Display 162 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 172 Outside Convex Mirror ccccceceeeee seen ees 173 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors 172 Outside Heated Mirrors cccceeceeeeeees 173 Outside Manual Mirrors c0ccseeeeeee ees 168 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 171 Outside Power Mirrors cccseceeeeeeeeeees 170 Outside Trailer Tow Mirrors 0 00s000 169 MPS einan 321 327 MyGMLINK COM 0ccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 601 N Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual scccevctinsiesest nai ann aa e 337 New Vehicle Break In ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 139 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 592 O OdOMOtel aiiiar iinan 244 Odometer TTP vcscdseccisscstedeendiedecedeceedaeveereacts 244 Off Road Driving ccceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeees 372 Off Road REcovery cccceeeeeeeantteeeeeeeeeees 369 Oil ENGINE ecrini criniera EE 459 PreSSUre GaQe eeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 256 Pressure Light srir anossa a 257 Oil Engine Oil Life System 0 e 462 Older Children Restraints ceeeeees 61 Online Owner Center
484. ry or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R or CD RW contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD R or CD RW that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD R or CD RW contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order e Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new
485. s head rests toward the center of the vehicle 68 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint the seating surface against the back of the for the child s body with the harness and also infant The harness system holds the infant in sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped place and in a crash acts to keep the infant or shelf like shields positioned in the restraint 69 Q How Should I Use a Child Restraint A Achild restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner To help reduce injuries an add on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle With built in or add on child restraints the child has to be secured within the child restraint A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed When choosing an add on child restraint be to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt sure the child restraint is designed to be system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label positioner and some high back booster seats saying that it meets federal motor vehicle have a five point harness A booster seat can also safety standards Then follow the instructions help a child to see out th
486. s if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature 20 Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward automatically Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward 21 Returning the Seat s to the Sitting A CAUTION To return the seat to the sitting position do the following A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash not latched to the floor The person wearing the belt could be A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could Position 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback
487. s on page 280 for the displays available If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons see DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons later in this section for the displays available DIC Operation and Displays With DIC Buttons If your vehicle has DIC buttons the information below explains the operation of this system The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for more information If your vehicle has DIC buttons you can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays See DIC Operation and Displays Without DIC Buttons later in this section DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages ZNS Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer and transmission temperature Some vehicles also display instantaneous economy and an Active Fuel Management indicator 261 i Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units tire pressure readings
488. s placed between the settings A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets i Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some of the air directed to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system will automatically select outside air 43 Defog See Defogging and Defrosting later in this section lt amp Recirculation Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on When the button is pressed an indicator light will come on This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors from entering your vehicle Recirculation may also help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defrost or defogging modes If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes the indicator will flash three times and turn off The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the button again or turning off the engine Air C
489. s if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep the battery from running down 221 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it is designed to help you park while in Reverse R It operates only at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h URPA helps make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles The URPA system detects objects that are close to the rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below hood or trunk level The system detects objects up to 8 feet 2 5 m behind your vehicle The URPA sensors determine how close these objects are from your bumper within this area 222 A CAUTION The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision URPA does not e Operate above speeds of 5 mph 8 km h e Detect objects more than 8 feet 2 5 meters behind the vehicle This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather Detect objects that are below the bumper underneath the vehicle or that are very close to the vehicle Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets So if you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the URPA system always check carefully before backing up by che
490. s playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon anda message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck pressing the CAT button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA MP3 WMA Format If you burn your own MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer e Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc e Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc 327 The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player upper slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playlists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize s
491. s the effect of reducing the load on the front However the front GAWR rear GAWR and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR must never be exceeded A CAUTION On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment such as a snow plow it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating GAWR but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance If your brakes can not work properly you could have a crash To help your brakes work properly when a snow plow is installed always follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer s recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio even though the actual front weight may be less than the front GAWR and the total vehicle weight is less than the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR Maintaining a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide proper braking performance Q what is total vehicle reserve capacity A This is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry If you are unsure of your vehicle s front rear or total weight go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer ca
492. s this will erase all previous programming from the Universal Home Remote buttons Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming Similarly some U S gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming Universal Home Remote procedures regardless of where you live replace Step 3 under Programming Universal Home Remote with the following Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and release every two seconds cycle the hand held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home Remote The Universal Home Remote indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly Proceed with Step 4 under Programming Universal Home Remote to complete Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons To erase programming from the three Universal Home Remote buttons do the following 1 Press and hold down the two
493. s will come on when a door is opened 219 Entry Lighting Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature When the doors are opened the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position If the dome override button is pressed in the lamps will not come on Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when the key is removed from the ignition They will turn off automatically in 20 seconds The lights will not come on if the dome override button is pressed in Reading Lamps If your vehicle has reading lamps they are located on the overhead console To turn on the reading lamps press the button located next to each lamp To turn them off press the button again 220 Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations To turn the lamps on or off press the button located next to the lamp The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the
494. s worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position on page 43 The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature which may turn off the passenger s frontal airbag If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Center Front Passenger Position Lap Belt Your vehicle may have a center front seating position To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor Make sure the release button on the buckle is To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the pull it along the belt safety belt quickly if you ever had to 53 Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted
495. s you do not have to do anything special to arm or disarm the system It works when you transition the key to RUN ACCESSORY or START from the OFF position When the PASS Key IIl system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again 137 If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 564 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have
496. seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more This chime and light will be repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the passenger s safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensors the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 90 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds e N Then the light should go out This means the system is ready 245 A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or
497. shift the transmission to the desired position Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes 155 Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph 8 km h 156 To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the bottom edge of the lever located above the parking brake pedal with the parking brake symbol to release the parking brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light will go off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 422 Shifting Into Park P A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK
498. side of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim Your vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust This damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Always wash your vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only GM approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of th
499. sing too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used wi
500. sition may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from starting Do not operate your vehicle in the ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period of time C RUN This is the position for driving It is the position the switch returns to after the engine starts and you release the key The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the engine off You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This position starts the engine Key In the Ignition Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves If you leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle a chime will sound when you open the driver s door Always remember to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you This will lock your ignition and transmission Also always remember to lock the doors The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK The radio power windows and if the vehicle has a sunroof and the OnStar System will wo
501. slots of the guide 58 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 54 Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat 59 Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger Although you cannot see them they are part of the safety belt assembly They help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably othe
502. so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Autoride suspension system this message displays when the Autoride suspension system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine See PASS Key IIl Operation on page 137 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly If you drive your vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable the warning comes on in about 20 minutes A sensor would be missing for example if you put different wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPM See your dealer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving eee See your dealer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 363 for more information 277 STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displa
503. ss and hold the rear of the control 11 Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are located on the driver s and passengers doors near the door handle Heated Seatback Press this button to turn on the heated seatback The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heat to the seatback off Indicator lights below the button show the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low w Heated Seat and Seatback Press this button to turn on the heated seat and seatback The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heat to the seat off Indicator lights above the button will show the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off If you want to use the heated seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the appropriate heated seat or seatback button again Memory Seat Mirrors and Pedals Your vehicle may have the memory package The controls for this feature are located on the driver s door panel and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat
504. ssible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 517 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and whe
505. ssion Transaxle Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases 616 Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle In Canada the service bulletin reference number can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer retailer or by calling 1 800 GM DRIVE 1 800 463 7483 This reference number is needed to order the service bulletin from Helm Inc RETAIL SELL PRICE 6 00 US Processing Fee Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 US Processing Fee Without Portfolio Owners Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 US Processing Fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For
506. stalled A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 447 Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 255 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your
507. stance to a detected object located behind the vehicle At distances between 40 inches 1 m and 8 ft 2 5 m a single amber light will come on At distances between 23 inches 0 6 m and 40 inches 1 m both amber lights will be on At distances between 12 inches 0 3 m and 23 inches 0 6 m all three lights amber amber red will be on Atdistances less than 12 inches 0 3 m a beeping sound will repeat for a short time and all three lights amber amber red will flash 224 When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC screen and a red light will come on the URPA display when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R This occurs under the following conditions e The driver disables the system e The parking brake pedal is depressed A trailer was attached to your vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk during your last drive when you turned off the vehicle If the attached objects are removed from your vehicle before the start of your next drive the system will return to normal operation unless an object is detected when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R If this occurs URPA assumes the object is still attached so you will have to wait until the vehicle is driven forward above 15 mph 25 km h before URPA will return to normal operation e
508. stem and Electronic Climate Controls If your vehicle has this system the rear heat and air conditioning controls are integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls To turn the system on press the AUX button on the front climate control system an indicator will be lit Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear system on in a mimic mode In this mode the airflow in the rear will be approximately the same direction temperature and fan speed as the front Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear system and the indicator off If the rear controls are adjusted the system will enter a rear independent mode Airflow in the rear will then be directed according to the settings of rear controls The rear system can be turned off by pressing the AUX button on the front climate control system and the indicator will turn off If the indicator in the front AUX button is off the rear system is off Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls Automatic Operation AUTO Press the mode button until this setting is selected to control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed AUTO will illuminate in the display when automatic operation is active Increase Decrease Temperature Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The r
509. sure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 516 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels If your vehicle has this feature sensors are mounted on each tire and wheel assembly except the spare tire The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle The TPMS is designed to alert the driver if a low tire pressure condition exists If your vehicle has the Driver Information Center DIC the driver may also check tire pressure levels using the DIC When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol located on the instrument panel cluster If your vehicle has the DIC feature a message to check the pressure in a specific tire will also appear on the DIC display The low tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message on the DIC display will appear at each ignitio
510. system and the indicator off If the rear controls are adjusted the system will enter a rear independent mode Airflow in the rear will then be directed according to the settings of rear controls The rear system can be turned off by pressing the AUX button on the front climate control system and the indicator will turn off Fan Knob Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the rear system off Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air 239 Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery 74 Vent This setting directs the air through the headliner outlets 4 Bi Level Air is delivered through the floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the second row seats The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings id Floor This setting directs most of the air through the floor outlets The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the second row seats 240 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Sy
511. systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt retractor assembly Be sure to do so Then the new retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in acollision After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger s safety belt retractor assemblies even if the frontal airbags have not deployed The driver and front
512. t such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire s tread is badly worn or if your vehicle s tires have been damaged replace them 20 Inch Tires If your vehicle has the optional 20 inch P275 55R20 size tires they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use The low profile wide tread design is not recommended for off road driving See Off Road Driving on page 372 for additional information 507 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustrations are examples of a typical P Metric and a LT Metric tire sidewall FPC SPEC 1153 yg x yess DOT MAL 948 Passenger P Metric Tire 508 A Tire Size The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Tr
513. t brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for battery location 490 Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep the battery from running down A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Siarting on page 491 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery or batteries has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps coul
514. t all So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above n MIN If it is not have sa your brake system checked to see if there JE TA is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 487 What to Add Notice When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed brake system parts For example just a
515. t be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on your DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change customization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in PARK P To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS Vv TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customizatio
516. t in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off CAUTION Continued 102 CAUTION Continued We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s airbag if e The right front passenger seat is unoccupied e The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat e The system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint e The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the
517. t lever to PARK P See Shifting Into Park P on page 157 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 422 146 A CAUTION If you have four wheel drive your vehicle will be free to roll even if your shift lever is in PARK P if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear two wheel high four wheel high or four wheel low not in NEUTRAL See Shifting Into Park P on page 157 REVERSE R Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 404 NEUTRAL N In this position your engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when your two wheel drive vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL
518. t soncssoisdsinransnssosassss 502 Halogen Bulbs serros 502 Headlamp Aiming s eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 499 License Plate Lamps accenn 504 Replacement Bulbs naiscc 504 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamp eeens 502 Buying NeW TIreS cceeeeceseeeeeeeeneeeeeeaneeeees 524 Galibratiori Sivvisserasscasdeacsteatecsearamersadanens 162 166 California Fuel pargana ean 447 California Proposition 65 Warning 445 Canadian Owner S ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee 3 Capacities and Specifications 05 572 Carbon Monoxide 125 127 160 400 422 Care of Safety BeltS siraanaata disini aain 556 Your CD and DVD Player aicce 353 Your CDs and DVDS o ae 353 Cargo CoVer nceenteaiand oa ain 192 Cargo Management System 194 GD MPS ce aceviee aavetertaevestetaaativetnaveters 321 327 Center Console Storage Area eeen 190 Center Front Passenger Position Safety Bell Sironin 53 Center Seal jx iecsic cess aasited aio ede asaeeeenss 19 Chains Tire corniere aia 530 Charging System Light a 248 Check Engine LIIE sasdcoscesinceosstsiatet csteccanssenbexestes 253 Checking Things Under the Hood 456 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeee 561 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeeees 68 Infants and Young Children 000 64 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 74 Older Children cccce
519. t to coast channels including music news sports talk traffic weather U S subscribers and children s programming XM provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM In the U S at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 or in Canada at www xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 438 9677 Playing the Radio cb Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume 306 Speed Compensated Volume SCV The radio has Speed Compensated Volume SCV While SCV is on the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise as driving speed changes That way the volume level should sound about the same as you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM volume label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV setting OFF Low Med medium or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM
520. tail 509 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C Dual Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 D DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 510 E Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture F Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread G Single Tire Maximum Load Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 Tire Siz
521. talled back onto your vehicle This way the spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your vehicle s original road tires and wheels in size and type do not include the spare in the tire rotation Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Your vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from othe
522. tar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 351 for more information On some vehicles you may have to hold the button for a few seconds and give the command ONSTAR in order to activate the OnStar Hands Free Calling feature On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voicemail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 175 How OnStar Service Works In order to provide you with OnStar services your vehicle s OnStar system has the capability of recording and transmitting vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys The vehicle information usually includes your GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in e g the direction from which your vehicle was hit When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling your vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you with location based services OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless you are in a place y where the wireless service provider OnStar has
523. tch System on page 543 for more information 536 Use the wheel wrench hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you to assist in reaching the spare tire Tilt the tire retainer G at the end of the cable when the tire has been lowered so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening 8 Put the spare tire near the flat tire Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle 1 Remove the center cap if your vehicle has one by placing the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out If the wheel has bolt on wheel covers loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise If needed finish loosening them by hand The nut caps will not come off Using the flat end of the wheel wrench pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Do not remove the wheel nuts yet 537 A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Jacking Locations Overall View A Front Position Raising your vehicle with the jack B Rear Position improperly p
524. tch System cceeeeeee 543 Chemical Paint Spotting eee 561 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 547 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 561 Spate TIG cess e ive cnas tees Wad eirinn iig 552 442 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Vehicle Identification ee 562 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0000 564 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 562 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 006 565 Service Parts Identification Label 563 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 566 Electrical System 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeee 563 Underhood Fuse Block scceeeiee 567 Add On Electrical Equipment 00 563 Capacities and Specifications 572 Windshield Wiper Fuses nccc 564 Power Windows and Other Power OPTIONS srira ia capeereens tees 564 443 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs You will get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACVelco E Parts GM Goodwrench E Accessories 444 Accessories and Modifications When you add non GM accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as airbags bra
525. tem or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 484 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message is displayed you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield w
526. ter reset stem to set your choice DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 462 for information on how to reset the message This message clears itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle or until the message is reset See Engine Oil on page 459 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE If your vehicle has a Tire Pr
527. tery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Programming the Universal Home Remote System Follow these steps to program up to three devices 1 Press and hold down the two outside Universal Home Remote buttons releasing only when the Universal Home Remote indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons 2 Hold the end of your hand held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 At the same time press and hold both the desired Universal Home Remote button and the hand held transmitter button Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section 179 4 The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons Press and hold the newly trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on continuously programm
528. tery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 e If you are still having trouble see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The vehicle s doors can be locked and unlocked from about 3 feet 1 m up to 65 feet 20 m away with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased operating range of 195 feet 60 m away However the operating range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to start it There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 114 115 With Remote Start and Power Liftgate and Liftglass Without Remote Start Similar With Remote Start and Liftglass Without Remote Start Similar The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system Q Remote Vehicle Start If your vehicle has this feature it may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start following for more detailed information 116 Lock Press the lock button to lock all the doors If enabled
529. th plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on your leather 555 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt
530. the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 523 and Wheel Replacement on page 528 for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the ratchet wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 52
531. the liftgate as it is opening and closing Notice lf you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door you could break the liftgate or the liftgate glass Always check to make sure the area above the liftgate is clear before opening it To open and close the liftgate press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter until the liftgate starts moving Press the RKE button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 115 for more information The liftgate can also be opened and closed by pressing the power liftgate button on the overhead console Press the button a O second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation a Power Liftgate Button on Overhead Console The liftgate can be power opened by pressing the touchpad switch on the liftgate handle Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation 127 Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch The liftgate can be power closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation The power liftgate my be temporarily disabled under extreme high or low temperatures If this occurs the liftgate can still be operated manually The power liftgate may not operate
532. the memory function at any time press one of the power seat controls memory buttons power mirror buttons or adjustable pedal switch If something has blocked the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals recall may stop working If this happens remove the obstruction and press the appropriate control for the area that is not responding for two seconds Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not recalling see your dealer for service Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver s door panel between buttons 1 and 2 With the vehicle in PARK P the driver s seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button You will hear a single beep and the driver s seat will move back If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center DIC automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition See EASY EXIT SEAT under DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 for more information The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the DIC For programming information see DIC Vehicle Customization With DIC Buttons on page 280 Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks the lever used to operate them is located on the
533. the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the i location of the engine oil LARS fill cap SAE 5W 30 AR Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL A ror lt AND GM 4GASOLINEE STANDARD 3QENGINES ES GM6094M D DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER Look for three things e GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 e Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Look for this information on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Notice Use only engine oil iden
534. the procedure 183 Follow these steps to program up to three devices 2 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps 1 From inside the vehicle press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them 184 3 Immediately return to your vehicle Press and hold the universal home remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds 4 Immediately within one second release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 5 choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work you probably have a Fixe
535. there could be a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away 249 This light may also come on due to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 486 for more c information A CAUTION Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light BRAKE T is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have United States Canada the vehicle towed for service This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it does not come If the light comes on while you are driving pull off on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn the road and stop carefully You may notice you if there is a problem that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 417 250 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light With the Anti Lock Brake System ABS this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That is normal If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the light stays on or comes on when you are driving your vehicle needs service A chime will sound when the light stays on If the regular brake system warning light is not on
536. tics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 61 Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position move the child toward the center of the vehicle If the child is sitting in the second row center position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 56 lf the child is so Z CAUTION small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child in a rear seat that has a lap belt if your vehicle has one Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 62 A CAUTION Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part
537. tified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle 461 If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both provide easier cold starting and better protection for the engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good performance and engine protection Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed 462 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 Change your oil as soon as possible w
538. tist information is available at this time on this channel available The system is working properly No Title Info Song Program Title not No song title information is available at this time on this available channel The system is working properly No CAT Info Category Name not No category information is available at this time on this available channel The system is working properly No Information No Text Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time message available on this channel The system is working properly _ _____ ___ __ 335 Radio Display Message Action Required CAT Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category the chosen category The system is working properly XM TheftLocked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message appears after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer XM Radio ID Radio ID label channel 0 If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer hardware failure Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this messa
539. tly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or See your dealer for the headphones assistance The DVD is playing but Check that the RSE video there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound DVD player Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio you have The video screen may display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message is displayed when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message is displayed if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message is displayed if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message is displayed if no disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed on the radio 347 DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with cl
540. tomer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 598 107 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 556 for more information Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 108 Notice lf you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag or the side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side windows the airbag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering for roof mounted rollover airbags if equipped Do not open or break the airbag coverings Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint
541. tter battery is low See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for additional information To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do Notice When replacing the battery use care the following not to touch any of the circuitry Static 1 Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the from your body transferred to these surfaces notch on the side of the transmitter and may damage the transmitter separate the bottom half from the top half 2 Remove the old battery but do not use a metal object to do this 118 3 Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the positive side of the battery facing down Use a type CR2032 battery or equivalent type Make sure the cover is on tightly so water will not get in 4 Snap the front and the back of the transmitter together 5 Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the RUN position During a remote start if your vehicle has an automatic climate control system the climate control system will default to a heating mode during colder outside temperatures and a cooling mode during warmer outside temperatur
542. tting preferences it is recommended that the mid range setting position 3 be used initially For more wipes select the higher settings for fewer wipes select the lower settings located closer to the off position on the multifunction lever The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting according to the weather conditions The wipers can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining When Rainsense is active the headlamps will turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position Notice Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision W Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed Heated Windshield Washer If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer fluid system it may be used to help clear ice snow tree sap or bugs from your windshield 209 The button is located in the switchbank under the climate controls Push the
543. ttons on page 267 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC or the trip odometer reset stem if your vehicle does not have DIC buttons for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle the Engine Oil Life System has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil ask your dealer a service station ora local recycling center for help 463 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter and the air filter restriction indicator if the vehicle has one 464 When to Inspect the Engine
544. turning off the PASS indicator When the passenger s temperature setting is set different than the driver s setting the indicator on the PASS button will illuminate and both the driver s side and passenger s side temperature displays will be shown 232 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display will change to show the current temperature s and AUTO will be lit on the display The current delivery mode and fan speed will also be displayed for approximately 5 seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle The light on the button will illuminate in recirculation 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver s or passenger s temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If
545. u are driving about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on your steering wheel The vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and stay there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until you reach your new desired speed then release it e To increase vehicle speed in small increments press the RES button Each time you do this you will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster 213 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce your speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time you do this the vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed 214 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed dow
546. u can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past Roof mounted rollover airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle during a vehicle rollover or in a severe frontal impact They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes If your vehicle has roof mounted airbags they are designed to provide both side impact protection and rollover protection Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION Both frontal and roof mounted rollover airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close to an inflating airbag
547. u can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution StabiliTrak will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road But you can turn StabiliTrak off if you ever need to See StabiliTrak System on page 363 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 404 Even with StabiliTrak you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you may want to turn StabiliTrak off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds 401 The Anti Lock Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock Brake System ABS on page 361 e Allow greater following distance on any slippery road e Watch for slippery spots The road
548. u will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the following occurs e The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with outside power foldaway mirrors the controls are located on the drivers door armrest Press A to select the driver s side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press A again to deselect this mirror Press B to select the passenger s side mirror Then press the arrows located on the four way control pad to adjust the mirror Press B again to deselect this mirror Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving speeds To reset the power foldaway mirrors fold and unfold them one time using the mirror controls This will reset them to their normal position 171 Turn Signal Indicator Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change Ground Illumination Lamps The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps in the base of the mirror These lamps help you see the area near the base of the front doors when it is dark out Outside Automatic Dimming
549. uctions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do the following 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6 543 7 Place the bottom edge of the jack A on the wheel blocks B separating them so that the jack is balanced securely 2 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 533 5 If the spare tire does not lower turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends with the backs facing each other 544 9 Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire wheel blocks under the vehicle toward the 10 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the front of the rear bumper jack until it lifts the end fitting 8 Attach the jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack and place it with the 545 Continue raising the
550. uel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVG ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button 263 Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to
551. under low battery conditions 128 If you shift the transmission out of PARK P while the power function is in progress the liftgate power function will continue to completion If you shift the transmission out of PARK P and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed the liftgate may reverse to the open position Cargo could fall out of the vehicle Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure the lights will flash and a chime will sound The liftgate will hold open temporarily then slowly close See your dealer for service before using the liftgate Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position After removing the obstruction the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle the power function will deactivate and the liftgate will switch to manual operation The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center DIC will indicate that the liftgate is open After removing the obstructions manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position The liftgate will now resume normal
552. until it locks into the upright position 35 3 Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling the carrying handle located at the rear of the seat rearward 4 Roll the seat out of the vehicle There is a track in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle Installing the Third Row Seat To install the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle 2 Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on the floor and roll the seat forward The front latches should lock into place If the latches do not lock try tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly 36 3 Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the seat to engage the rear floor latches A CAUTION A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it 4 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor 5 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position A CAUTION If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked
553. up See Safety Belts They and make mistakes Anticipate what they Are for Everyone on page 38 might do and be ready Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a Collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do these things or pull off the road in a safe place to do them These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life 356 Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle e Judgment e Muscular Coordination e Vision e Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against t
554. ur Own Service Work ccce 445 Dome Lamp Override 0 c ceceeeeeeeeteeeees 219 Dome LAMPS arriera 219 Door Delayed Locking ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 LOCKS nsnsi saaheass One vsinastaudecdaxtnnvenss seamevans 122 Power Door Locks asiicnainiwhutitiens 123 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 123 Rear Door Security Locks eeeee 124 Driver Position Safety Belt cceeeceeeeeeeeeeees 43 Driver Information Center DIC 06 260 DIC Operation and Displays 261 267 DIC Vehicle Customization c ee 280 DIC Warnings and Messages 005 270 Driving At NIAT sorso et et canstas ien Std dented ne 389 GURY oecon aena EEO ANa 393 DefenSive onerosi enaa anaa 356 Drunken ssxscesattahecnssapuld dans tncnasxthiernaasanedans 357 FIO QWAY Ses cndaceis cece cosiancinsanducnsadsaucitacseactnte 394 Hill and Mountain Roads a 398 In Rain and on Wet Roads ee 390 OTMROAG irekirik hires 372 Recovery HOOKS 2 ivset cesccientiasoinneiees 406 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 405 WINTER nisccuccesshnnssuapauveteassswadkantbanadsesstamcvans 400 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 231 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 337 E Electrical System Add On Equipment cseeeeeeeeeee seen 563 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 566 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0005 564 Instrument
555. ur Wheel Drive Rear Axle Automatic Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One Piece Propshaft Spline Two Wheel Drive with Auto Trans SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Canada 10953455 meeting GM Specification 9986115 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 12378261 in Canada 10953455 meeting GM Specification 9986115 AUTO TRAK II Fluid GM Part No U S 12378508 in Canada 10953626 Spline Lubricant Special Lubricant GM Part No U S 12345879 in Canada 10953511 or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830 Usage _ Fluid Lubricant Hood Hinges Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 in eee 10953474 Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 12346241 in Points nde a 10953474 Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 i Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 591 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ACDelco Part GM Part Number Number Engine Air Cleaner Filter High Cap
556. ur cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice lf you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice If you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 for more information 471 Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on location A CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out
557. ur vehicle has rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock Security Lock Label shown To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door 124 When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter if the vehicle has one the power door lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open If the driver s side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock If the passenger s side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger s door is open and the key is in th
558. vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 256 Oil Pressure Gage Canada United States The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure zone the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC S
559. vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system which locks the shift lever in PARK P when the ignition is in the LOCK You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 145 If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK P as you maintain brake application Move the shift lever into another gear A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 159 Engine Exhaust CAUTION Continued A CAUTION Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if e The exhaust system sounds strange or different e Your vehicle gets rusty underneath e Your vehicle was damaged in a collision CAUTION Continued 160 Running the Engine W
560. ver comes on Vehicle on page 107 for more information about and stays on it means that something modifications that can affect how the system may be wrong with the airbag system If operates this ever happens have the vehicle Z CAUTION serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the airbag s See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 for more on this including important safety information Stowing of articles under the passenger s seat or between the passenger s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 105 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 616 106 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedur
561. ver happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while the front wheels are straight ahead 367 Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 360 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around th
562. ver put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passengers frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off CAUTION Continued 86 CAUTION Continued We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat position move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10 If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 74 There is no top tether anchor at the right front seatin
563. veryday driving conditions the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages so you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages If your vehicle has electric cooling fans you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans may turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating your air conditioning system the fans may change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required 483 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for reservoir location AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the sys
564. vibration in the steering system Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal 150 Automatic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located to the left of the instrument panel cluster Your vehicle has Four Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak For information on StabiliTrak see StabiliTrak System on page 363 Use this dial to shift into and out of four wheel drive You can choose among five driving settings Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on If the lights do not come on you should take your vehicle in for service An indicator light will flash while shifting Fast flashing means the conditions were not met to make the desired shift typically the vehicle was going too fast the automatic transmission was not in neutral or the clutch pedal was not fully pressed Slow flashing means the shift is in progress It will stay on when the shift is completed If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift it will return to the last chosen setting 2 1 Two Wheel Drive High This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations Your front axle is not engaged in two wheel drive This setting also provides the best fuel econom
565. way Driving on page 394 e Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules 394 The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the
566. way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat
567. windows are clear W Defrost Press this button to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly This mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor vents In this mode the system will automatically force outside air into your vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is close to freezing Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window QD Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn on the rear window defogger It will automatically turn off several minutes after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 237 If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the c
568. work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 2 Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function varies for each disc LJ Subtitles Press this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function varies for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function varies for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection amp Clear Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numerical inputs 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this button before entering the number 345 Battery Replacement Recommended Action To change the remote control batteries do the The ignition might not be following turned on or in accessory The picture does not fill the Check the display mode 1 Remove the battery compartment door screen There are black _ settings in the setup menu located on the bottom of the remote control b
569. y AUTO Automatic Four Wheel Drive This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable When driving your vehicle in AUTO the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is primarily sent to the rear wheels When the vehicle s software determines a need for more traction the system will transfer more power to the front wheels Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two Wheel Drive High 4 Four Wheel Drive High Use the four wheel high position when you need extra traction such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off road situations This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle This is the best setting to use when plowing snow 151 4 Four Wheel Drive Low This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque You may never need this setting It sends maximum power to all four wheels You might choose Four Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off road in deep sand deep mud deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills StabiliTrak will not engage in this mode See StabiliTrak System on page 363 for more information A CAUTION Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK P You or someone else could be seriously injured Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL See Parking Brake on page 156 152
570. y does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint 65 A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide 66 Q What are the different types of add on A child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s inst
571. y passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels will not get good traction You cannot accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you will need longer braking distances It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck When you drive on sand you will sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under
572. y your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well You may add 300 Ibs 136 kg to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight Your vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds 318 kg from your trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits Your maximum trailer would only be 7 800 lbs 3 538 kg You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But you must still consider the effect on the rear axle 430 Because your rear axle now weighs 3 100 lbs 1 406 kg you can only put 900 Ibs 408 kg on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 lbs 2 721 kg It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Tra
573. you still have brakes but you do not have ABS If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have ABS and there is a problem with your regular brakes In addition to both lights you will also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then restarted See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 The ABS warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 251 StabiliTrak Indicator Light QD ee If equipped this warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started If the warning light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If it stays on or comes on when you are driving there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak system and your vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system is off and will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak system is active If the StabiliTrak system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service See StabiliTrak System on page 363 for more information 252 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant tem
574. your abdomen This could cause 3 To make the lap part tight pull up on the serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder shoulder part belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 55 The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body 56 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second row seat and the third row if your vehicle has one Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt Second Row 1 For the second row remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body Third Row If your vehicle has a third row remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat 57 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the
575. ys when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been automatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 404 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 363 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear e One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time e The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 278 e The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions e The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer e The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on th

Chevrolet 2007 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents